JP7409711B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, various presentation means are provided on the game board surface, and the presentation means are used to improve the interest in the game.
As such a presentation means, there is one that includes a movable presentation means (so-called gimmick) and operates the movable presentation means (so-called gimmick) in a predetermined operating mode (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2013-236681A

However, there is room for improvement in terms of accurately operating the movable presentation means.

In view of these circumstances, the present invention aims to accurately operate the movable presentation means.

In order to solve such problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance that can control the performance according to a signal from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means that can operate in a predetermined manner, and a movable performance means that can operate in a predetermined manner, the main control means initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or It is possible to restore the state to the state before the supply stopped, and the effect control means controls the initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and controls the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. In the initial operation, the time for moving the movable presentation means from the initial position to the operating position is different from the time for moving the movable presentation means from the operating position to the initial position, and the game progresses. It is possible to display a game standby screen in which a plurality of performance symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination on a predetermined display means in a standby state when the game standby screen is not played, and power is not supplied to the main control means while the game standby screen is displayed. While the power supply is stopped, if the power supply to the production control means continues, it is possible to continue displaying the game standby screen, and then when the power supply to the main control means is started. In addition to controlling the initial operation of the movable presentation means, it is possible to display the plurality of presentation symbols in a specific combination different from the predetermined combination, and to When the power supply to the main control means and the performance control means is started after that while the power supply is stopped, the plurality of performance symbols of the specific combination are displayed after displaying an initial screen. It is possible that the power supply to the main control means is stopped, while the power supply to the production control means is continued, and then the power supply to the main control means is started. , it is possible to display the plurality of performance symbols in the specific combination without displaying the initial screen .

According to the present invention, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately.

It is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing initial setting processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot determination processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing display information on an information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the production control section. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production control part. It is a diagram showing customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration standby time determination table. It is a figure which shows the prefetch type|system|group performance process in a performance control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing in a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation production pattern decision table. It is a diagram showing jackpot preview performance determination processing in the performance control section. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot notice determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the overall control unit. (a) is a diagram showing command reception interrupt processing in the overall control unit, and (b) is a diagram showing V blank interrupt processing in the overall control unit. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the accessory production setting process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the accessory production execution process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in the main control board of a 1st modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of a 2nd modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation. 39 is a diagram showing a modification of the specific example (FIG. 38) in which various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a modification of the specific example (FIG. 41) in which various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power supply restoration is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and with reservation memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. It is a figure which shows the modification when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the initial operation mode of a 1st movable member, and a specific example of a required time. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the performance operation mode of a 1st movable member, and a required time. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a specific example of the initial operation mode and required time of the second movable member. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the performance operation mode of a 2nd movable member, and a required time. It is a diagram showing a comparison between an initial operation mode and a presentation operation mode. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the performance operation mode of the 1st movable member at the time of jackpot notification. It is a figure which shows the modification of the required time of an initial operation mode, and the required time of a performance operation mode. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of an initial operation mode and a performance operation mode. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of an initial operation mode and a performance operation mode. It is a figure which shows the comparison in the performance scene of a 1st movable member and a 2nd movable member. It is a figure which shows the comparison of the initial motion and performance motion of each movable member of a board accessory. It is a figure which shows the comparison of the initial motion and performance motion of each movable member of a frame accessory. It is a figure which shows the modification of the board role object initial movement pattern related to performance movement. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power supply restoration is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and with reservation memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of restarting power supply to the main control board after it has been stopped.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a on which game balls flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 is removably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported around the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, making the gaming area 5a visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game ball put out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and have flowed into an overflow ball flow path to be described later, and a lower tray 12 for storing game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations on the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to perform sound (music, voice) production. It has become. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a dispensing abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the direction of the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball sending solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball sending solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the central front side of the upper tray 11, there are a production button 17 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) on the left and right, which function as input devices for determining and selecting operations related to various productions to be described later. are arranged side by side.

The performance buttons 17 include a performance button 17 (not shown) that can perform a decision operation (operation input), a performance button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 3) that detects an operation on the performance button 17, and a performance button 17 that can perform a decision operation (operation input). A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 3) is provided for driving the game machine 1, and allows the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The effect button 17 is capable of emitting effect light by lighting (emitting light) the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 3), in a predetermined light emission mode. , to move in the vertical direction between a standby position (origin position) located below and a production position located above by the driving force of a button drive motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b, and/or the button It is possible to perform a production operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of a button vibration motor that is a part of the drive device 17b, and the button position detection sensor (not shown) makes it possible to perform a performance operation. is detected.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) connected to the cross key 19 to detect operations on the cross key 19. (see FIG. 3) is provided so that a player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a lending/returning operation section 20 that allows the user to perform lending operations for game balls and return operations for storage media such as cards storing balances. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the ball rental machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the balance stored in the storage medium accepted and rents out game balls. is carried out, and when a return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation section 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. While this is being detected, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 3), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 3) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emitting device for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes the front part of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges out toward the front, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member that can transmit light. has been done. By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a game ball firing device 26 (not shown) for firing the game ball toward the gaming area 5a, A lock mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The game ball launcher 26 includes a launch member 28 (not shown) for launching game balls, a launch solenoid 28b (see FIG. 3) for driving the launch member 28, and a drive unit from the launch member 28 to the lower left of the game board. A firing rail 29 (not shown) that slopes upward toward the end, and a stopper 30 (not shown) that stops the game ball A at a firing position that is the inclined lower end of the firing rail 29 are provided. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 are provided. A firing ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding the game balls fired by the game ball firing device 26 to the upstream portion of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40, called a so-called center case, that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior and making them flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the gaming area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always be entered are provided at intervals, and these general winning holes When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) in 43 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 3), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). The ball is delivered to the upper tray 11 as a ball.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal game gates 44 (normal game starting area) through which the game balls can pass, and the game balls that have passed through the general game gates 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 3), a normal symbol winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. Note that the winning lottery for normal symbols will be described later.

At the lower part of the gaming area 5a and directly below the stage part 42, a first starting opening 45 (special figure starting area) is provided in which a game ball can always enter a prize (ball), and this first starting opening 45 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 3), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are transferred from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray as prize balls. It is set to be paid out on the 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is placed in a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a normal symbol winning lottery). A variable starting section 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball hitting) is possible or easy.

The variable starting part 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can enter a prize (ball entering), and a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) that allows a game ball to enter a prize (entering ball) into the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 3), a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that converts (variably) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that converts the second starting port opening/closing member 48 into opening and closing. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 3) is provided for this purpose. When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is arranged to be dispensed into an upper tray 11. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

A prize opening lamp NR (not shown) is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 to illuminate the area around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect by emitting light from a panel illumination device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general figure gate 44, there is a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a special symbol jackpot lottery). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the basic mode to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won.

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can be won (balls entered), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (Fig. 3), a big winning opening opening/closing member 51 that converts (variable) the winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the big winning opening opening/closing member 51. It is provided. When the grand prize opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball, and when the grand prize opening 50 is in an open state, winning a game ball (entering a ball) is difficult. ) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are sent from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls into the upper tray. It will be paid out on 11th.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, and a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, A winning ball channel 52 (not shown) is provided that receives the game balls detected by the second starting opening detection switch 47a and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, and allows them to flow down while being collected.

In addition, a winning confirmation detection switch 52a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the downstream portion of the winning ball flow path 52 to detect the game ball flowing down the winning ball flow path 52 after being detected by various detection switches. This winning confirmation detection switch 52a detects the game ball again after being detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a. This is used to determine whether it was a proper winning (ball hitting) or an abnormal winning (ball hitting).

Outside the gaming area 5a, there are a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, a second special symbol reservation display 64, And, a normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 3) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, and a round number display 66 (see FIG. 3) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) is being executed or a time-saving game. A main information display device 59 is provided, which includes a right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 3) that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a during this state.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the prize gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery with the first special symbol is a jackpot lottery in which random numbers for jackpot determination, etc. (judgment information) are acquired when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (ball entered), and the obtained random numbers for jackpot determination and jackpot are obtained. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing it with the judgment value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The jackpot lottery with the second special symbol is when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 (enters the ball), a random number value for jackpot determination, etc. (judgment information) is acquired, and the obtained random number value for jackpot determination and jackpot are obtained. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing it with the judgment value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is performed, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of each special symbol, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order. do. When the special symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LEDs are lit in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot lottery (jackpot mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot lottery (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot lottery (special game determination) of the second special symbol. Refers to the state in which the right to execute has been acquired. "Jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the jackpot 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 or 10 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls entered), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous for the player in which the player can easily win the prize ball. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games that have different degrees of advantage to the player, but details will be described later.

The winning lottery for normal symbols involves acquiring a random number value for determining a hit when a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for determining a hit with the winning determination value to determine whether it is a "win". This corresponds to determining whether or not. In addition, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the normal symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the normal symbol that shows the lottery result is stopped and displayed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning manner or a losing manner).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. The winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) win a prize (balls entered). In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition for the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol holding display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a first special symbol jackpot lottery (a first special symbol This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing a variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Note that although up to four first reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is a jackpot lottery of the second special symbol that is stored when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. This is for displaying the number of rights (second pending memory) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second pending memories. In addition, although up to four second reservation memories are stored, it may be fewer or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a normal symbol winning lottery (fluctuating display of normal symbols) that is stored when a game ball enters (passes) the common symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Fuzuzu pending memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of Fuzuzuzu pending memory. In addition, although up to four ordinary figures are stored in the storage, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if you win a jackpot lottery with a special symbol, "7" will be displayed in a stopped state, and if you lose, "-" will be displayed in a stopped state, and if the variable display is in progress, the light will turn off and "-" will be displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous fluctuation display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation display can be started by turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand what has started.

At the lower right inside of the gaming area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first reservation display 83, a sub-second reservation display 84, and a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85. A sub-information display device 80 is provided, which includes a sub-normal figure reservation display 86, and a sub-right-hitting display 87 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting).

The sub-first variable display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol, and the sub-second variable display 82 is for displaying the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol. (notification), each of which is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (variable display), and when the corresponding special symbol stops being displayed, the result of the jackpot lottery (in the case of a jackpot, it lights up, loses, etc.). ) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82, so that it can be grasped only whether or not the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed, it blinks and stops while the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed. It may be configured to turn on or off when displayed.

The sub-first holding display 83 is for displaying the number of first holding memories, and the sub-second holding display 84 is for displaying the number of second holding memories. It is composed of two LEDs. When the number of pending memories is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of pending memories is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the number of pending memories is "2". When the number of pending memories is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED lights up, and when the number of pending memories is "4", the left and right LEDs flash. .

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, a mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in case of a win, turns off in case of loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to be able to grasp only whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub-normal symbol fluctuation display 85 is configured to blink while the normal symbol is in the fluctuating display, and to turn on or off when the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state. You can.

The sub-universal figure reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of ordinary figures pending memory, and is constituted by two LEDs arranged on the left and right. Then, when the number of stored general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of stored general drawings is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the stored general drawings are held. When the memory number is "2", the left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of fugu pending memory is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and the fugu pending memory number is "4". ”, the left and right LEDs flash.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a, and a , a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is provided, which is a liquid crystal display whose display area is smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A first movable member 73 is provided that resembles the same, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided at the bottom of the production space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. Examples of performance displays include a customer waiting demonstration performance performed during a customer waiting state in which no variable display of special symbols is performed, a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbol 70a executed while variable display of special symbols, etc. be.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas: a left area, a center area, and a right area. By scrolling the effect pattern 70a vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of special symbols executed on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. In response to (synchronization with), a variable display of the effect pattern 70a is performed. That is, in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the special symbol, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and before the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging display), and the special symbol is fluctuating. In response to the stop display of the display, the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a is stopped (still display). Note that, in addition to the symbols indicating numbers, symbols indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.

Note that the "temporary stop display" is a display in which the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (completely stopped). (not done).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or the combination of regular performance symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is any other format. be. Note that the manner in which the performance symbols 70a are variably displayed is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls in the left-right direction, or one that rotates (rotates) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as reach effect, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectations for a jackpot (special game) to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot winning expectation level") are increased. There is.

Here, "reach performance" is a jackpot game executed for the player in which a part of the combination of performance symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a pattern of variation that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), two performance symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7'', the game stops temporarily, and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are four types of reach effects: "normal reach effect," "SP reach effect," "SPSP reach effect," and "full rotation reach effect."

"Normal reach effect" means that the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a is stopped in the center area. This is a reach effect that is executed with a fluctuating reach state.

"SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect pattern 70a with the reach state formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation of a jackpot is high) ) It is a reach effect where a movie (video, animation, etc.) is played.

"SPSP reach performance" means that a development performance (see Figure 62) is performed after a normal reach performance or SP reach performance, and is executed after the development performance, and has a better performance effect than the normal reach performance or SP reach performance (the expectation of a jackpot). This refers to a reach performance in which a movie (video, animation, etc.) with a high value (high) is played.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed when all the combinations of the plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify a jackpot are aligned. In this embodiment, this is a reach effect that is executed only when winning a jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation regarding the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect<SP reach effect<SPSP reach effect<full rotation reach effect (jackpot confirmed).

Further, on the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special symbol pending number (U1), which is the current number of first pending memories, is displayed. a first pending icon display area 70B, and a second pending icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special symbol pending number (U2), which is the current number of second pending memories. An icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed is formed (see FIG. 47).

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display area 70B1, a second display area 70B2, a third display area 70B3, and a fourth display area 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The number of first reservation icons corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is displayed on each of the display sections 70B1 to 70B4. In other words, the number of first reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of reserved first special symbols (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 70B2 displays the first pending icon H11. The first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory is displayed on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third, and the third display section 70B3 displays the variable display of the first special symbol. A first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon H14 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display area 70D1, a second display area 70D2, a third display area 70D3, and a fourth display area 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The number of second reservation icons corresponding to the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is displayed on each of the display sections 70D1 to 70D4. In other words, the number of second pending icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the second special symbol pending number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon H21. A second pending icon H22 indicating a second pending memory is displayed in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the third display section 70D3. A second pending icon H23 indicating a second pending memory is displayed, and a second pending icon H24 indicating a second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display section 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special symbol reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special symbol reservation number" may be referred to as the "second reservation number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second pending icon that was displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a). When the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon TH disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In addition, in this embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and "the icon" may be collectively referred to as "icon".

The first movable member 73 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 3), in a predetermined light emission mode. The driving force of the first movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 3), moves the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located above and the production position located below. By moving to , it is possible to perform a performance operation, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 3), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the second movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 3), moves the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located at the bottom and the production position located at the top. By moving to , it is possible to perform a performance operation, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the robot is at the origin position.
Further, the second movable member 74 includes a rotating body 74a on the back surface, and the rotating body 74a is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by the driving force of a drive motor provided in the second movable member 74, for example. It can be rotated.
Note that although the "rotating body 74a" is cited as an example, a member that performs not only rotation but other operations (for example, protrusion) may also be provided.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other's production positions, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate at the same time. By not doing so, they avoid conflict with each other.

Note that if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, when one movable member moves to the production position and returns to a position that does not overlap with the production position of the other movable member, The other movable member may be moved to the presentation position.
Further, for example, if the second movable member 74 is arranged further back (in the Z direction) than the first movable member 73 (the arrangement can be reversed) so that they do not collide with each other, the first movable member 73 and the The two movable members 74 may be operated simultaneously.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball rental), island equipment, etc. A game ball storage section 101 (not shown) that stores supplied game balls and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that centrally controls the progress of the game. ), a payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the game ball payout device 100 according to payout control commands from the main control board 110, and production control commands from the main control board 110. A production control device 130A (not shown) containing a production control board 130 that controls production according to the performance, and a power supply device 160A (not shown) containing a power supply board 160 that supplies power voltage to various control devices. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 3) is provided for outputting game information (game signals) to the outside of the game machine.

(Game board configuration)
Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a back unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 includes a game board 500a made of transparent resin, on which a game area 5a is formed by the above-mentioned inner rail 35 and outer rail 36, and a window portion that makes the rear visible. .

And, inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, general prize opening 43, regular gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first starting opening 45 (first starting opening detection switch 45a), variable Starting part 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b), variable winning part 49 (big winning opening 50, big winning opening detection switch 50a, big winning opening opening/closing member 51 , a big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) is provided.

Further, at the lower right part of the game board 500a, a certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is affixed is provided so as to be rotatable in the left and right directions with the left side as an axis. Fixtures 503a for removably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 are provided at four corners of the board 500a, respectively.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered by the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed when the right side of the certificate stamp plate is pinched with the fingertips and rotated toward the left.

The fixture 503a includes an operation section located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft section extending from the operation section to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft section provided at the tip of the shaft section and located on the back side of the game board 500a. The engaging piece is provided with an engaging piece located on the side, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engaged position) and a second state (engaged position) by operating the operating section. There is.

The back unit 501 has a unit base 501a that is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front side and a window portion that makes the rear view visible. , a movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), etc. are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. Further, a production control device 130A is provided on the rear side of the first image display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the production control device 130A. Note that, hereinafter, the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) may be referred to as a board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving parts 503b are provided, respectively, for removably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixture 503a described above.

When attaching the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the certificate plate 502 is opened and the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are placed in the first state (non-engaged position). Then, a male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided on the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided on the right side of the back unit 501. Thereafter, when the back surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the back surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engagement piece of the fixture 503a enters into the interior of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the engaging pieces are put into the second state (engaging posture) by turning the operation parts of the four fixtures 503a, the engaging pieces engage with the fixed receiving parts 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A and the certification stamp plate 502 is closed, the panel unit 500 Then, the installation work of the back unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out to open the certificate plate 502. Thereafter, when the engaging pieces are placed in the first state by turning the operation parts of the four fixtures 503a, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixed receiving part 503b is released.

In this state, when the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are separated, the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a exit from the fixed receiving portions 503b. Thereafter, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal work of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of making the game machine 1 like new. Therefore, here, we have explained how to attach and detach the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 when the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3, but the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3. It is also possible to replace only the panel unit 500.

Specifically, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the locking mechanism. By preventing the panel unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the panel unit 500 can be replaced (like new). Therefore, when replacing only the panel unit 500, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal operation after opening the glass frame 4.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically explained using FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 centrally controls the progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 is a main control unit that includes a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to volatile storage means) that serves as a work area during calculation processing. 110m, an input port for main control, an output port, etc. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the production control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is It is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the production control board 130.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b include a gaming ROM area where programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area where programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, and access is prohibited. Also, an unused area of 16 bytes or more where "0" is stored, a ROM comment area where data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table where the start address of the timer interrupt processing described later is set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access-prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The gaming ROM area includes a gaming program area where programs related to the progress of the game are stored, a first unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game are stored. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area where programs related to performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. Information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a gaming RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a gaming program and an information RWM area used as a work (working area) when executing an information program are arranged in this order. There is.

The gaming RWM area includes a gaming work area used by gaming programs as work, a first unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and a temporary area where data being processed by gaming programs is stored. A gaming stack area for saving data and a second unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The gaming work area includes a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum to be described later) for judging abnormalities in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes as the game progresses. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as work, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data currently being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Stack areas for information are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a gaming area (gaming ROM area, gaming RWM area) that performs processing based on a gaming program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on an information program will be explained below. Explain the relationship.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a gaming program, it basically refers to the gaming data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the gaming RWM area while using the gaming RWM area as work. ing. Additionally, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referenced, and the contents of the information RWM area are referenced and updated while using the information RWM area as work. ing.

However, in the processing based on the gaming program, although the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, they can be referenced. Furthermore, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the gaming RWM area cannot be updated, but they can be referenced.

When performing processing based on the information program, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area in the processing based on the gaming program, and then the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the gaming RWM area immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the gaming program is returned.

In addition, immediately after starting the information program, the stack pointer of the gaming stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all registers used in the gaming program are transferred to the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program immediately before the end of the information program are restored from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, it is possible to protect the data used by the gaming program when performing processing based on the information program, and prevent inconveniences from occurring when returning from the information program to the gaming program. Things will disappear.

The input ports of the main control board 110 include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, and a big winning opening detection switch 50a. , winning confirmation detection switch 52a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120, etc. are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output ports of the main control board 110 include a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, and a first special symbol display. Symbol retention display 63, second special symbol retention display 64, normal symbol retention display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, payout control board 120, an effect control board 130, etc. are connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and game notifications to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the gaming information output terminal board through the output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of the payout command from the main control board 110, and also controls the firing of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control section 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control section 122 that drives the game ball launcher 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, etc. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and operates the game ball payout device. 100, and sends predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the production control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101. A payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to an output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and the putout ball detection switch 100a controls the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100. When the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control for paying out game balls is ended.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, etc. (not shown). A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to an input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feeding solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, etc. are connected to an output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed based on the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is fired so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game ball is fired by driving the solenoid 28b.

The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. . Note that the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the firing of the game ball in one minute is approximately 99.9 times per minute. The number is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an effect control unit 130m, and a first image display device 70 (main display/audio control unit 140 that controls the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, and the panel It is equipped with a lamp/drive control section 150 that controls the lighting device 76, the board drive device 75, etc., and an input port, an output port, etc. for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby processing commands received from the main control board 110. Control is performed in order to cause various control units (display/audio control unit 140, lamp/drive control unit 150) to execute various effects in accordance with input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a. output data or commands).

A performance button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), etc. are connected to the input port of the performance control board 130. In the production control board 130, a production button detection signal indicating that the production button 17 has been operated is input from the production button detection switch 17a, and a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display/audio control section 140 controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image in response to a command from the production control section 130m. and controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display/audio control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that includes an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a VDP (as an image processor). An image control unit 145 consisting of a video display processor), a CGROM 146 in which image data etc. are stored, and a frame buffer etc. provided inside the image control unit 145 that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. A VRAM 147, an audio control unit 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 storing audio data, and input/output ports.

The general CPU 142 receives the operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the general ROM 143, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the general RAM 144 as a work area, thereby executing the operation clock received from the effect control unit 130m. In response to production instruction commands and the like, it controls the image control unit 145 and the audio control unit 148 to execute various productions (outputs data and commands).

The control ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM, etc., and displays a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands, and animation of a production pattern. Anime patterns, anime scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation that constitutes the specific content of the image production, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, etc. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), and drawing method. , the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data is stored, and receives commands (display list, drawing commands, etc.) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142) and the data stored in the CGROM 146. Based on the image data, drawing data that is the source of a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated. The image data includes an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, a production pattern image, a background image forming the background of the production pattern. This is material data representing individual images such as , character images, and dialogue images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame, which is formed by combining (overlapping) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 x 32 pixels). ing. Note that the pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. This CGROM 146 is read out in units of image data by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying the color. Note that the CGROM 146 may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed, rather than all of the image data. Further, as a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. This VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the overall control unit 141 (main CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub It has a frame buffer area etc. corresponding to the liquid crystal display.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on instructions (display list) from the general control unit 141 (main CPU 142). , reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and generates a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

Note that the image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display Generates a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and displays the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Output to. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

Also, between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), there is a general-purpose device that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs it. A substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function to convert image data into an image format compatible with the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected and when a 17-inch XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected. Absorb.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, input/output ports, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp/drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to received performance instruction commands, etc., control is performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined performances (data and commands are output).

A frame lighting device 10, a handle light emitting device 15c, a button driving device 17b, a board lighting device 76, and a sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output port of the lamp/drive control section, and the production control section Based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the sub CPU 130m (sub CPU 130a), various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the panel lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 are lit. It also performs drive control of drive sources such as the button drive device 17b and the motor and solenoid of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, (the production control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power outage detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power outage (power outage). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 during a power outage (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a becomes operational when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, and the main CPU 110a enters an operational state when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, even in the event of a power outage (power outage), the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c will be retained, and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state will be returned to the state before the power outage (power outage). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery include a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state", and the states related to the second starting port opening/closing member 48 of the second starting port 47 include a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state". It has a "non-time-saving gaming state" and a "time-saving gaming state."

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and a "non-time-saving gaming state." (2) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and a "time-saving gaming state." (3) " A high-probability time-saving gaming state that is a “high-probability gaming state” and a “time-saving gaming state.”

Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state", and this gaming state is referred to as the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment. ”. In addition, in this embodiment, the "low probability time saving gaming state" and the "high probability time saving gaming state" are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, so they may be referred to as "specific gaming states". .

In this embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" refers to a jackpot lottery in which a special symbol jackpot lottery is held on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. This refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning is set as low as, for example, 1/299. On the other hand, a "high probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than that of a low probability gaming state, and the probability of winning a jackpot is set as high as, for example, 1/59.8. . Therefore, in the "high probability gaming state", it is easier to win a jackpot than in the "low probability gaming state". Note that the low probability gaming state is changed to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game described below is completed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, there are four stages of setting values consisting of setting value 1 to setting value 4, and depending on each stage, the probability of winning the jackpot in the "low probability gaming state", the probability of winning a jackpot in the "high probability gaming state" The probabilities of winning the jackpot in the "gaming state" are different. For example, if the above jackpot winning probability is the value of setting value 1, then with setting value 4, the jackpot winning probability in the "low probability gaming state" is, for example, 1/256, and the jackpot winning probability in the "high probability gaming state" is 1/256. The winning probability is, for example, 1/46. Although the values of setting value 2 and setting value 3 are omitted, they are set so that the probability of winning the jackpot increases step by step from setting value 1, and speaking of the degree of advantage, setting value 1 < setting value 2. The relationship is <setting value 3 <setting value 4.

In this embodiment, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability gaming state is referred to as a "probable jackpot." Further, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a low probability gaming state is referred to as a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving gaming state" refers to the average fluctuation of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. This is a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time-saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is easily set to be short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and a variable display of the normal pattern is performed on the normal pattern display 62, but after the variable display of the normal pattern starts, For example, the display stops after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.18 seconds, for example, after the normal symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, the "time-saving gaming state" refers to the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the regular symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. Refers to a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be shorter than the "non-time-saving gaming state" and longer than the "non-time-saving gaming state", for example, 2 seconds. . Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to be low, for example, 127. It is set as high as /128. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is advantageous in the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, compared to the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is set like this. However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. . Further, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be set to, for example, 0/128.

(Types of jackpot games)
Next, types of jackpot games will be explained.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of game balls in the first starting hole 45 are "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and "second jackpot game". 3 jackpot games", and has "first jackpot games" and "second jackpot games" as types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of game balls in the second starting slot 47. are doing.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is opened for up to 29 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed.

After the end of the first jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, considering the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed.

The "second jackpot game" is a round game that is executed up to 10 times. After the second jackpot game ends, the low-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third jackpot game" is a round game that is executed up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, considering the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed.

In addition, the number of fluctuation displays (in this embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10,000 times) of the specific gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as "high probability". It is sometimes expressed as "number of times" or "time-saving number of times."

In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot games, but the number is not limited to three, and there may be fewer or more than three types. In addition, the opening time of the big prize opening opening/closing member 51 is set to 29 seconds in any jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game), but the opening time does not have to be 29 seconds, The opening time may vary depending on the game.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of wins will be explained.

In this embodiment, the types of winning games that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the regular game gate 44 include a "first winning game" and a "second winning game", If the game is in a non-time saving game state when the winning lottery is executed, it becomes a "first winning game", and if it is in the time saving game state when the winning lottery is executed, it becomes a "second winning game".

The "first winning game" is to open the second starting port 47 for a maximum of 0.18 seconds. In other words, it is a winning game in which the second starting port opening/closing member 48 is opened once.

The "second winning game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened for 2 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2 seconds. In other words, it is a winning game in which the second starting port opening/closing member 48 is opened twice.

In addition, in the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the second starting opening 47 even before the opening time has elapsed.

In this way, in the "time-saving gaming state", it is easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 47, and the player can play the game more advantageously without consuming game balls than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is possible to proceed.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of special symbols as described later, and the table is stored in the main ROM 110b.

As shown in Figure 4, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the special symbol display device (type of starting opening), jackpot determination result, special symbol (stop special symbol data), random number value for reach determination, and special symbol. The number of reservations (U1 or U2), the random number value for special symbol variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol are associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of special symbols" determines at least the jackpot determination result and the variation time of the special symbols. Moreover, since the configuration is such that when there is a jackpot, the reach is always performed, the random number for determining the reach is not referred to when there is a jackpot. The random number range for reach determination is set to 97 (0 to 96), and the random number range for special figure variation is set to 100 (0 to 99).

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 4, fluctuation pattern (1) (normal fluctuation ) The variation time (T2) of variation pattern (2) (shortened variation) is set to be shorter than the variation time (T1) of variation pattern (2) (shortened variation). For example, the variation time (T1) of variation pattern (1) (normal variation) is set to 12 seconds, and the variation time (T2) of variation pattern (2) (shortened variation) is set to 3 seconds. In addition, although the maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the number of reserved special symbols, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved special symbols. Therefore, "4" will not be referenced as the pending number.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation time are determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol variation.

Then, based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command (special symbol variation pattern designation command) is generated, and information on the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the performance control board 130.

Here, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command, and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", it indicates a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command on the first special symbol display 60 corresponding to the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45, and the MODE data is "E6H". When it is "E7H", it indicates a command for specifying a variation pattern of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 corresponding to the game ball winning in the second starting hole 47.

Moreover, in the performance control board 130, the performance contents such as the performance symbols 70a are determined based on the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern designation command), as will be described later. In the rightmost column of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 4, the performance contents such as the performance symbols 70a are described for reference.

Here, as for the production contents, "normal variation" and "shortened variation" mean that the plurality of production symbols 70a vary at high speed and stop without becoming a reach, and are different from normal variation. The shortening fluctuation differs from the shortening fluctuation in that the shortening fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation. Note that the normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, and full rotation reach are as described above, so their explanations will be omitted here.

In addition, "Number of pseudo consecutive notices" means "Number of times pseudo consecutive notices are executed", and "Pseudo continuous notices" means that during the fluctuating display of special symbols corresponding to one jackpot lottery, This means a notice based on a variation mode in which the pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and then changed again, and the effect pattern 70a is varied and temporarily stopped a plurality of times.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing setting values based on a setting change operation, and a process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value based on the setting confirmation operation, and initial operation of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) provided in the board unit 500. Performs drive source initial operation processing, etc. Note that details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for reach determination, and in step S51, updates the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, Update the initial random value for determining normal symbols.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160, which indicates the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, the power supply that was supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine whether a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process moves to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process moves to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred, and the process moves to step S54. If the input does not continue for the predetermined period, there is a possibility of an instantaneous power outage in which the voltage of the power supply drops momentarily. Assuming that there is a difference, the process moves to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to notify the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c is transmitted from the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process moves to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for waiting for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process moves to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, it is assumed that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be established, and the process moves to step S58.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining number of payouts specification command is received, the remaining number of payouts specified by the remaining number of payouts specification command is saved, and if the remaining number of payouts specification command is not received, the remaining number of payouts is saved. Save “0” as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here will be referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described later, and after the power is restored, a command to specify the number of payouts in accordance with the remaining number of payouts will be sent to the payout control board 120. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and saves it in a predetermined area of the gaming RWM area. By doing this, it becomes possible to determine whether the data in the gaming RWM area is abnormal based on the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c is backed up (power restoration) in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access. After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but in the event of a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), When the supply of operating power is resumed, the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is performed for some reason when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RWM clear process will not be executed. This prevents the machine from performing unintended operations, making it possible to ensure reliability as a gaming machine.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step S12, and performs startup wait processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the game ball firing device 26 to fire the game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power is being restored and the process moves to step S17. If the backup flag has not been saved, the process is transferred to step S17. The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power cut during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the gaming RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S19 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (gaming program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing is performed to change (update) the set value (probability of being determined to be a jackpot in jackpot determination), which is a stage of the advantage of the game. Note that details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S24.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S20. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S22. move.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, the checksum is determined to be abnormal, as this is due to the first power-on or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery, and the process is performed in step S22. will be moved.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value (during game) area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (during game) area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value (during game) area is not within the appropriate range. , the process moves to step S22.

The "setting value (playing) area" is an area where setting values are saved when the game is not in the setting change mode, and is an area where the final setting values are saved. The setting value range in the setting value (playing) area is "1 to 4", which is a value that is +1 to the setting value in the setting value (changing) area.
The "setting value (currently being changed) area" is an area in which the setting value being set is temporarily saved when the setting is in the setting change mode. The setting value range in the setting value (currently being changed) area is 0 to 3, and is a value minus 1 from the setting value in the setting value (currently playing) area.
Note that when simply referred to as a "set value area", it refers to a "set value (during game) area" and a "set value (currently changing) area".

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing (gaming program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process to issue an unrecoverable error notification indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a display of an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are fully lit in a predetermined luminescent color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 displays an unrecoverable error message indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred. This means outputting an error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be performed and the process moves to step S24, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (gaming program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing is performed to initialize the gaming control state (initialize the gaming RWM area other than the set value area). Note that details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (gaming program) in step S25. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses are operated for a predetermined period of time. Processing for initial operation is performed over the period of time. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 120 and the production control. The information is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") when the power is turned on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame The lighting device 10 for the board and the lighting device 76 for the panel are all lit up in a predetermined color (e.g. white) for a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71, the RWM area is cleared on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71. A display may be displayed to inform you of this.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (gaming program) in step S28. Specifically, processing is performed to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during game) area of the gaming RWM area on the information display 113. Note that details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (gaming program) in step S29. Specifically, processing is performed to initially operate the various drive sources described above (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) over a predetermined period of time. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process to terminate the setting confirmation notification and the like and execute a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, or The lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the power has been restored (from a power outage). This means outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage designation command and a normal symbol storage designation command, which will be described later) to the production control board 130 in step S32. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and also performs processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S33. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a starts a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S35, controls the progress of the game (main control) by allowing all interrupts. A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initial setting process is ended.

In other words, from when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is finished, the game is in a pre-start state before the game progress control starts, and after the initial setting process is finished, the game progress control is stopped. The game becomes ready for play.

In this way, for setting change operations, RWM clear operations, and setting confirmation operations, multiple conditions (operations) are set, so it is not possible to easily change settings, clear RWM, or confirm settings. , it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts and improve the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, making it possible to avoid the most fraudulent setting changes. It is possible to increase the security of events where acts are likely to be committed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including when the backup flag has not been saved), unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped. This eliminates the problem of inconveniencing game parlors and players, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value (during game) area is not within the appropriate range, that is, if the previous power outage may have occurred while changing the settings, an unrecoverable error will occur even if the checksum is normal. By executing the process and stopping the progress of the game, the game will not proceed with setting values not intended by the game store, improving the reliability of the game machine. becomes possible.

Also, while changing settings (during setting change mode) or checking settings (during setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, a status confirmation display 68, a first image display device 70, a second image display You can recognize that settings are being changed by checking the device 71, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76, and on the back (back side), you can check that settings are being changed by checking the information display 113. It is possible to recognize something. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the condition for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions increases, so fraudulent acts can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Note that if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20, irreversible error processing is executed, but at the time the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the setting of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c is The initial value "1" may be saved in the value area and the process may be moved to step S24.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current gaming state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

Furthermore, by not determining the presence or absence of the setting change flag, it may be possible to prevent unrecoverable error processing from being performed even if the previous power-off occurred while the settings were being changed.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the gaming RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may proceed to irreversible error processing. .

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting change in progress signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. Note that the setting change signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being changed, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting change is completed, and then stops outputting.

In step S19-2, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This makes it possible for the game store clerk to check the status confirmation display 68 to know that the settings are being changed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the production control board 130 in step S19-3. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing setting change notification to notify that the setting value is being changed.

"Setting change notification" means displaying a setting change screen on the first image display device 70 or second image display device 71 indicating that the setting value is being changed, or This means that the device 76 is turned on in a predetermined color (for example, white) throughout the setting change. Note that the audio output device 9 may output a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”) indicating that settings are being changed. As a result, the game store clerk can check that the settings are being changed by checking the first image display device 70, second image display device 71, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, and audio output device 9. becomes possible.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a subtracts the setting value in the setting value (playing) area by 1 and saves it in the setting value (changing) area. Initialize (clear to 0) the setting value (during game) area.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value (currently being changed) area is within an appropriate range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S19-8, and it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area is not within the appropriate range. If so, the process moves to step S19-7.

If it is determined in step S19-6 that the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area is not within the appropriate range, the main CPU 110a sets the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area to the initial value in step S19-7. 0”.

The main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113 in step S19-8. Specifically, with reference to the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area, a value added by +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Thereby, the game store clerk can check the information display 113 to understand the setting value before the change.

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a setting value update operation, the process moves to step S19-10, and if there is no setting value update operation, the process moves to step S19-13.

The main CPU 110a updates the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area by +1 in step S19-10, and performs setting value correction processing in step S19-11. Specifically, when the updated set value is "4", which exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), a process is performed to correct the set value to "0".

The main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113 in step S19-12. Specifically, with reference to the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area, a value added by +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. This allows the game store clerk to check the information display 113 to understand the setting value before it is finalized.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting value confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a setting value confirmation operation, it is assumed that the setting value has been confirmed (setting change mode is ended) and the process moves to step S19-14; if there is no setting value confirmation operation, the setting value is updated. The process moves to step S19-9, assuming that there is a possibility that this will occur.

In step S19-14, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area and saves it in the setting value (currently playing) area, and in step S19-15, the main CPU 110a increases the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area. Initialize the value (clear to 0).

The main CPU 110a ends displaying the setting value on the information display 113 in step S19-16, ends displaying the status confirmation display 68 in step S19-17, and ends the current setting change process.

In this way, even if the setting value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value is set as the setting value, which prevents the gaming machine from unexpectedly It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game machine from causing trouble to the game parlor and the players due to the operation.

In addition, during the setting change (in the setting change mode), the gaming store clerk should check the status confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, and the frame illumination on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, and it is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back (back side). It has become. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the setting value confirmation operation is performed when the setting key switch 112a changes from the ON state to the OFF state, but it may also be performed when the RWM clear switch 111a changes from the OFF state to the ON state, or when the dedicated switch is turned OFF. The touch sensor 15a may change from the OFF state to the ON state by inputting the signal from the touch sensor 15a to the main control board 110. , the detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, etc.) provided in a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be set from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be set from the OFF state to the ON state. It may be assumed that it is in the ON state.

Additionally, a settings change designation command is sent at the start of the settings change process, and a power-on designation command is sent after the settings change process ends, but instead of the settings change designation command, a settings change start designation command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the settings change end designation command may be sent at the end of the settings change process, or may be sent after the settings change process ends.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 8. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c other than the set value area. As a result, the game progress state will be initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of gaming machine 1), and the data (other than the setting values) in the gaming RWM area before RWM clear will not be carried over. Become.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S24-2. Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that RWM clear has been performed. Note that if another security signal is being output from the security signal terminal, output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the currently output security signal ends.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear designation command to the production control board 130, and ends the current RWM clear process.

Note that the RWM clear specification command is sent at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the RWM clear processing is completed, but instead of the RWM clear specification command, the RWM clear start specification command is sent. However, an RWM clear end designation command may be sent instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the RWM clear end designation command may be sent at the end of the RWM clear process, or may be sent after the RWM clear process is completed.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting confirmation signal (security signal) in step S28-1. Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting confirmation is in progress. Note that the settings confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output while the settings are being confirmed, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the settings confirmation is completed, and then stops outputting.

In step S28-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the settings are being changed. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. Thereby, the game store clerk can check the status confirmation display 68 to know that the settings are being confirmed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the production control board 130 in step S28-3. Thereby, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 will be performed.

"Setting confirmation notification" means displaying a setting confirmation screen on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71 indicating that the settings are being confirmed, or displaying a setting confirmation screen on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or This means lighting up all the lights in a predetermined color (for example, white) while checking the settings. Note that the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Setting values are being confirmed”) indicating that the settings are being confirmed. As a result, the gaming clerk can check the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the audio output device 9 to understand that the settings are being confirmed. becomes possible.

The main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113 in step S28-4. Specifically, with reference to the setting value in the setting value (playing) area, a number (1 to 4 in this case) indicating the setting value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. This allows the game store clerk to check the information display 113 to understand the current set value.

In step S28-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process moves to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 110a ends displaying the setting value on the information display 113 in step S28-6, ends displaying the status confirmation display 68 in step S28-7, and ends the current setting change process.

Note that the settings confirmation command is sent at the start of the settings confirmation process, and the power recovery specification command is sent after the settings confirmation process ends, but instead of the settings confirmation specification command, the settings confirmation start specification command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting confirmation end designation command may be sent. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be sent at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be sent after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, and the convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, from the start of power supply to the time when the game progress is controlled (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) and the game becomes possible (in the pre-start state), input other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a is required. Device (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, big winning opening detection switch 50a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection The presence or absence of a signal input from the sensor 54a) is not monitored.

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control starts, even if a game ball enters any winning opening (including the starting opening), the winning will be invalidated and the game ball will not be paid out. It looks like this. In addition, even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning is invalidated and the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 change. No display is made and the jackpot game is not executed. Further, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the passage is invalidated, the normal pattern is not displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display 62, and the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, in a situation where it is difficult to imagine that a player will play a game before game progress control is started, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing and reduce the processing load.

Furthermore, in the pre-start state before game progress control is started, no error notification is made even if a situation in which various errors occur. Therefore, in a situation where it is difficult to imagine that a fraudulent act will occur before the game progress control is started, unnecessary processing can be avoided, and the processing load can be reduced.

Note that the setting changing signal, RWM clear signal, setting checking signal, and irreversible error signal may be output from separate output terminals instead of being output from a common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing (gaming program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt processing, after the initialization processing of the main processing is completed, a clock pulse is input at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110. This is executed by controlling the progress of the game.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area in step S100, and performs time control processing (game program) in step S110. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric accessories.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number update process (gaming program) in step S120. Specifically, random values for jackpot determination, special symbol determination random values, special pattern fluctuation pattern determination random values, hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, and regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination random values are updated. Specifically, processing is performed to update each random value and random number counter by adding +1 to them. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial random value is set as a new initial value for each cycle, and the random value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process (game program) in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S30, processing is performed to update the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing (gaming program) in step S200. Specifically, it is determined whether there is an input to various switches such as the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. It performs processing to set predetermined data if there is an input. Note that details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special figure special electric control processing (gaming program). Specifically, the determination of the special pattern determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the big winning hole. It performs processing such as opening and closing the (big winning opening 50) and setting the gaming state. In addition, the details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs general figure general electric power control processing (gaming program). Specifically, processing such as determination of the obtained normal pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44, variable display of the normal pattern, and opening/closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game) is performed.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol judgment information performed in the ordinary symbol general electricity control process, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (gaming program) in step S500. Specifically, with reference to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, payouts corresponding to various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) are made. Processing for transmitting a number designation command to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (gaming program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (unauthorized winning errors such as a game ball entering the second starting slot 47 when not in the auxiliary game, or a game ball entering the grand prize opening when not in the special game), and various winnings. An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls entered into the mouth does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down, a magnetic error in which the magnetic detection sensor 53a detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period, A radio wave error occurs when the radio wave detection sensor 54a detects an abnormal radio wave for a predetermined period of time, a door open error occurs when the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a occurs while the progress of the game is being controlled. It is determined whether an error (or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) has occurred, and processing is performed to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the production control board 130. As a result, the production control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (gaming program) in step S700. Specifically, external output data (gaming information) output from the gaming information output terminal board 90, starting opening/closing data outputting to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, and big winning opening opening/closing data outputting to the winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b. data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special Processing is performed to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output to the symbol pending display 64 and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (gaming program) in step S750. Specifically, port output processing that outputs signals such as the external information data created in step S700, starting opening opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, and special symbol Display output processing that outputs signals such as pending display data and normal symbol pending display data, sending a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and awarding as described below. Refers to the ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) and performs processing to send payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning holes to the payout control board 120. . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole, starting hole) during normal gaming state, To count gaming performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, regardless of the gaming state. Process.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming performance information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed. By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((Number of payouts during normal play ÷ Number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a one-time storage area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area is provided for the game, and the normal base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data. Note that details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the gaming RWM area, enable interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode) before game progress control starts, so the payout Since the counting of the number and number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and the system is used to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 50, and the system is used to pay out the prize balls from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information. Note that details of the first starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, it is a process for determining whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing normal pattern determination information. I do.

The main CPU 110a performs winning confirmation detection switch input processing in step S260. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning ball flow path 52. If no detection signal is input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the input control process is ended.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for 3-prize balls by adding data indicating 3-prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-4. If the first pending number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first pending number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first starting port detection switch input process end.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first pending number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the first pending number (U1) is updated. A corresponding first special symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S230-3 in the vacant storage section. Store figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first preliminary determination process, the preliminary determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the currently acquired special symbol determination information (first pending memory) is stored before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A planned variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process in step S230-8 in the performance transmission data storage area, and The first starting port detection switch input process ends.

As a result, the planned fluctuation pattern can be transmitted to the production control board 130 as a first starting slot winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the production control board 130 that has received the first starting slot winning designation command Analyzes the specified command and performs a predetermined preview effect over one or more variable displays that are executed from before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first starting opening winning designation command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead preview effect that executes. Note that the pre-read preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. This is done using

In addition, regarding the second starting opening detection switch input process, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the first special symbol retention storage area, the first retention memory, the first special symbol retention number (U1), and the first special symbol storage designation. The command, the first advance judgment process, and the first starting opening winning designation command are respectively sent to the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the second special symbol retention storage area, the second retention memory, the second special symbol retention number (U2), and the second special symbol retention storage area. It may be read as the 2 special symbol storage designation command, the 2nd preliminary determination process, and the 2nd starting opening winning designation command. Note that hereinafter, the first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command may be collectively referred to simply as the starting opening winning designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric line processing data = 0, the process for starting the variable display of special symbols based on the reserved memory (special figure judgment information) and the special figure special electric line processing data are changed to "1". A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed to perform the process and the like. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 1, the special figure special electric line processing data and the process for stopping and displaying the special symbol and transmitting a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 130 as the variable time elapses are changed to "2". A special symbol variation process (step S320) is executed to perform processing and the like.
If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss, and the opening time of the jackpot game will be set if it is a jackpot special symbol, depending on the elapse of the stop time of the special symbol. Then, the special pattern special electricity processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small hit special symbol, the opening time of the small winning game is set, and the special pattern stop processing to change the special pattern special electricity processing data to "4" ( Step S330) is executed.

If the special figure special electric line processing data = 3, the jackpot game processing (for performing the process for executing the jackpot game or the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "5" based on the end of the final round game) Step S340) is executed.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 4, the processing for executing the small winning game or the process of changing the special figure special electric processing data to ``0'' or ``3'' based on the completion of the ending of the small winning game are performed. A small winning game process (step S350) is executed.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 5, the jackpot game ending process is performed to perform the process for ending the jackpot game or the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the jackpot game. (Step S360) is executed.

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 14. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second held count (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second pending number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, specifies the special symbol storage designation corresponding to the second pending number (U2) after the subtraction. The command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the second special figure determination information storage area. A shift process is performed on the stored data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first number of reservations (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first number of reservations (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, issues a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation number (U1) and the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Set to . As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second reservation number is changed to the first reservation number). However, in the order in which the game balls entered the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information retention storage area or the second special figure determination information retention storage area was shifted (first The number of reservations and the second number of reservations may be subtracted in the winning order), or the first special figure determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the first number of reservations may be subtracted). It may be preferentially subtracted from the second reservation number.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a jackpot and the stop special symbol data of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. Execute jackpot determination processing. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table (FIG. 4) based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and determines the variation of the special symbol. A special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is performed to determine the pattern (fluctuation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variable performance pattern which is a performance mode of a variable performance performed during the variable display of special symbols is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbols are not displayed fluctuating and the special game (jackpot game) is not being executed, but the requirement also includes that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. You can.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing in the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting values stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, selects a jackpot determination table (not shown). Specifically, if the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area is shifted from the first special figure determination information reservation storage area, the first special figure determination information storage area (not shown) A jackpot determination table for a special symbol is selected, and if it has been shifted from the second special symbol determination information retention storage area, a jackpot determination table for a second special symbol (not shown) is selected.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing the current setting value and the random number value for jackpot judgment with the jackpot judgment table. If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-4, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-6.

The main CPU 110a sets the current gaming state information in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S311-4, selects a special symbol determination table for jackpot (not shown) in step S311-5, and proceeds to step S311-7. Transfer processing.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for losing (not shown), and moves the process to step S311-7.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which jackpot determination is to be made and the random number value for special symbol determination against the special symbol determination table. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is determined.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-7 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot determination process.

(Main control board performance display data setting process)
The performance display data setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 by displaying the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. It is determined whether the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched and the process moves to step S850-2; if the display switching value is not "0", the process moves to step S850-2. , the process moves to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not to be changed. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether a lighting confirmed flag for determining whether lighting of the information display 113 has been confirmed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmation flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113 and the process moves to step S850-4; if the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved, the information display is performed. The process moves to step S850-3 to confirm that the device 113 is lit. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step S850-3, the main CPU 110a displays a lighting confirmation display for lighting all segments (including the decimal point) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) forming the information display 113. Determine the data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a obtains a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is obtained, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is obtained. Get the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", get the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown) and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of outs during the normal period indicated by the number of outs during the normal period counter, and the obtained normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

In step S850-6, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 described above is referenced, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be done. Note that the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the display switching time counter described above in step S850-7, and determines in step S850-8 whether the display switching time counter is larger than an upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display on the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process moves to step S850-15; if it is larger than the upper limit, the display on the information display 113 is Assuming that the time for switching the performance information to be displayed has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-described lighting confirmation flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process moves to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S850-11. .

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the data selection counter described above in step S850-12, and determines in step S850-13 whether the data selection counter is larger than an upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit, the process moves to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the game ball counting process described above, and in step S850-16, in the game ball counting process described above, the main CPU 110a restores the register for information in the main RAM 110c. The gaming stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is completed.

In this way, all segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (the lighting is confirmed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is malfunctioning or which segment is malfunctioning.

In addition, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare performance information (normal base value) in two gaming sections, and it becomes possible to check the actual performance of the gaming machine and to understand the possibility that fraudulent activity has occurred.

(Display information on the information display in each game section)
Next, the display information on the information display 113 in each game section will be explained using FIG. 17. In the display information table of FIG. 17, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL.", which indicates the normal base value of the current gaming section, and "bL.", which indicates the normal base value of the previous gaming section. ``b1.'', ``b2.'' indicating that it is the normal base value of the gaming section two times before, and ``b3.'' indicating that it is the normal base value of the gaming section three times ago.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 is "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of outs during normal play is "0". “00” indicates that the number of outs during normal play is “1” or more and the normal base value is “1” to “99”, and “01” to “99” indicate that the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that the number is "100" or more. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and will be displayed in two digits.

The numerical information displayed on the numerical segment does not change its display form (it is lit up) regardless of the game period or the number of outs during normal play, but the identification information displayed on the identification segment does not change regardless of the game period or the number of outs during normal play. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal play, etc. (the presence or absence of a calculated normal base value and the credibility of the calculated normal base value).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when displaying the identification information of the game section for which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed blinking. In addition, in the game sections after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during the normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is displayed by lighting.

Here, to give an example of the display on the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of outs during normal play is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". If the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." is displayed blinking in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical value segment. ' will be displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is ``99'' or less, performance information that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display, ``00'' to ``99'', is displayed in the numeric segment, while the normal base value If the value is ``100'' or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed as ``99.'' in the numerical segment, making it easier to understand that it is an abnormal normal base value. .

Also, if the normal base value is less than 10, "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical value segment, and it is displayed as two digits (for example, "01", etc.). It becomes possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

Also, when displaying the normal base value of the current gaming section, if the number of outs during normal play in the current gaming section is 0 to 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." displayed on the identification segment is displayed blinking, it becomes easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, "--", which is not a numerical value, will be displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value will not be calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand what is not being done.

Note that the game ball counting process, performance information calculation process, and performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, game ball counting The processing may be executed within an input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is a game program.

Also, the out ball detection switch 39a detects game balls that have entered the general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, and big winning opening 50, and out balls that have entered the out opening 39. Instead of detecting this, the out ball detection switch 39a may detect only the game ball that has entered the out port. In that case, each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the number of outs It is best to add (total number of outs, number of normal outs) by 1.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of main processing in the production control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. The CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are enabled in step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs sub random number update processing in step E7. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the production control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and when there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, the process determines whether or not various commands are being transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands are being transmitted. conduct. Note that details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power-on designation command has been received, processing is performed to notify the power-on. Specifically, a power-on notification command is sent to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the audio output device 9 outputs a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if the power restoration designation command has been received, a process for notifying power restoration is performed. Specifically, a power recovery notification command is sent to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the audio output device 9 outputs a power restoration sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if a command has been received, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. conduct. Specifically, a customer waiting production command is sent to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , the voice output device 9 outputs customer waiting demonstration sound. The details of the customer waiting performance process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a gaming state update process in step E350. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received, and if it has been received, updates the gaming state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs pending information update processing in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. Processing is performed to update the number of reserved 1st special symbols, the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, the number of reserved regular symbols, etc.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect process. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a starting opening winning designation command or a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command has been received, and if it has been received, the command is executed as a pre-reading effect. Performs processing related to icon change effects and continuous preview effects. Note that the details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

The "icon change performance" is a type of pre-read preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the pending icon and the display mode of the icon. In this embodiment, an icon change effect for a pending icon may be referred to as a "hold icon change effect" and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect."

The "continuous notice performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances.

The sub CPU 130a performs special figure special electric production processing in step E600. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a performance symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol confirmation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not the received command is received, and if the received command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs a general figure and general electric display process. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c and determines whether or not a normal pattern designation command, a normal pattern fluctuation designation command, a normal pattern confirmation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command, etc. If the received command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. , or terminate the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processes such as outputting signals such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150. .

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis processing of production control section)
The command analysis process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in the production control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process moves to step E302, and if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and processing for executing setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting confirmation notification process in step E305. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting confirmation notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and processing for executing setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If the command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power ON notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, a notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. If so, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and processing for executing power-on notification or power restoration notification, and the movable production device (first movable member 73, Processing is performed to perform an initial operation in which the second movable member 74) is operated in a predetermined manner, an initial light emission in which the board lighting device 76 is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, and the like.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related designation command. If it is an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error system specification commands" include unrecoverable error specification command, fraudulent winning error specification command, abnormal winning error specification command, magnetic error specification command, radio wave error specification command, door open error start specification command, door open error end specification This includes commands, operation error specification commands, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notifications according to the type of error specification command received (unrecoverable error notification, unauthorized winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification) etc.), a notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, processing is performed to update the gaming state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to the gaming state according to the gaming state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, a process of setting a production instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to update the number of reserved special symbols stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the number of reserved icons displayed on the image display device. conduct. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process moves to step E315, and if it is not a special symbol designation command, the process moves to step E316.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E315. Specifically, processing is performed to determine the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E317, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E319.

The sub CPU 130a performs a variable effect pattern determination process in step E317. Specifically, based on the content of the received special figure variation pattern designation command, a variation production pattern, which is a production mode of a variation production executed by a production device including an image display device, is determined, and a production indicating the variation production pattern is determined. Processing is performed to set the instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and processing for executing the variable production is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs jackpot preview effect determination processing in step E318. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E317, whether or not to execute a jackpot preview performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed). Also, a performance mode (pattern) of the jackpot preview performance to be executed is determined, and execution information of the jackpot preview performance is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E319, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a symbol confirmation command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process moves to step E320, and if it is not a pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step E321.

The sub CPU 130a performs production symbol stop processing in step E320. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped performance symbols and ending the variable performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and processing for ending the variable production is performed.

In step E321, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game designation command. If it is a special game designation command, the process moves to step E322, and if it is not a special game designation command, the current command analysis process ends.

The "special game system designation commands" include jackpot opening designation commands, jackpot round designation commands, jackpot ending designation commands, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game performance determination processing in step E322. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining the opening performance of the jackpot game and executing the opening performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and in the case of a round designation command, In this step, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining the round performance of the round game and executing the round performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and in the case of an ending specification command, determining the ending performance of the jackpot game. Then, processing is performed to set a performance instruction command for executing the ending performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is ended. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening performance, round performance, and ending performance is performed.

(Customer waiting performance processing by the performance control department)
The customer waiting performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process moves to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance. The demonstration standby time determination table (see FIG. 22) for determining the standby time of is selected. Note that details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, with reference to the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 22, one demonstration standby time is determined from among a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is on standby for a demonstration. Specifically, it is determined whether a demonstration standby timer is set. If the demo is not on standby, the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated as not to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance, and if the demo is on standby, the demo waiting timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether the demo standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not 0, it is assumed that the customer waiting demonstration performance has not yet been executed, and the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated.If the demo waiting timer = 0, the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer and the current customer waiting performance process is ended. As a result, a customer waiting demonstration performance command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and a customer waiting demonstration performance that appeals to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demo standby time determination table)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration production.

In the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 22, the gaming state, the current state, and the selected demo standby time are associated with each other. Four types of demonstration standby times from 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the normal gaming state, and four types of demonstration standby times from 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the specific gaming state. is set.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 22 is the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, and the demonstration symbols are displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. The demonstration waiting time after the is displayed statically, the demonstration waiting time after the fluctuating display of the production symbol ends (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the production symbol is statically displayed, and the demonstration symbol after the end of the customer waiting demo production. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after it is displayed statically is different. By doing this, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 22 is that the fluctuating display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration waiting time is longer after the performance pattern is displayed statically after the time has elapsed. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the demonstration pattern waits for a longer time after the performance symbols are displayed statically on the image display device. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after the design is statically displayed is longer. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 22 is that the demonstration standby time is the shortest after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance. By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to players, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

As a sixth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is longer. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Pre-reading performance processing by the performance control unit)
The pre-reading performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to perform the icon change effect, the mode of effect of the icon change effect, and the like. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a determines an icon display mode for executing the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changing the already displayed pending icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform update processing.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process for determining whether to execute the continuous preview performance, the presentation mode of the continuous preview performance, and the like.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance execution process for executing the continuous preview performance determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a starting opening winning designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the starting slot winning designation command is received, the process moves to step E510-2, and if the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the production content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-8.

The "executable period of icon change performance" refers to a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, an icon change performance is not being executed, or an icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, if the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning in the first starting opening 45, it means that the normal gaming state is in effect, and the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning in the second starting opening 47. If the game is based on the above, it may be provided that the game is in a specific gaming state (a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), etc.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines that all the preliminary determination results of the advance reservation (the reservation memory corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command received earlier) are below the normal reach, that is, all the preliminary determination results of the advance reservation are normal fluctuations. Determine whether there is shortening variation or normal reach. If all are below the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and when all are not below the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. , one final icon display mode is determined from among the plurality of icon final display modes.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the display mode is such that an icon change effect is executed, the process moves to step E510-10, and if the display mode is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 26) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 26, the final icon display mode, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario are determined. Then, one change scenario is determined from among the plurality of change scenarios.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is ended. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). or a predetermined sound effect (the first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, the second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and the reserved icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

In addition, in the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, the icon change effect (the pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all preliminary determination results of advance hold are below the normal reach. The icon change performance may be executed when the preliminary determination result of advance suspension is that the ready-to-win performance is not performed, and the icon change performance may not be performed when the ready-to-reach performance is performed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon will not change during the variable performance corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon will not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. A change in the display mode will now occur, and the icon change performance will no longer impede the reach performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the preliminary determination result of advance hold includes one that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed; If there is no icon change effect, the icon change effect may be executed more easily (performed at a higher rate) than if it includes one that performs a reach effect.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the starting opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected.

The final icon display mode includes a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game will be executed). An icon has been set.

The jackpot winning expectation for special icons is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon < red character icon < rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that is guaranteed to be a jackpot. .

Here, the main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 25 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied according to the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is displayed at a higher rate than when the planned variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It will be selected.

In addition, in the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 25, in the case of a jackpot, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode, but it may be selected. .

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected. , For reference, the preliminary variation in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the variation are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command. , "The said variation" is a variation display (variation performance) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect is executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario is determined in which the display mode of the icon is changed regardless of whether or not a reach effect (a reach other than a normal reach may be performed) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table that uses as a determining factor whether or not a reach effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed in advance variation is executed. Alternatively, the scenario in which the When using such a change scenario determination table, the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, the display mode of the icon changes during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed, and the pre-variation in which a reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is lower than during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set in such a way that changes in the display mode of the icon occur at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which the change is not executed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a variable effect pattern. The variable performance pattern determination table associates the variable performance pattern designation command, the allocation ratio (%) for each variable performance pattern, and the variable performance pattern to be determined, and the performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is shown as a reference. is listed.

The variable effect pattern includes the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the audio output device 9, the board drive device 75, the board lighting device 76, the frame lighting device 10, the presentation button 17, and the cross key 19. This is a performance mode of a variable performance performed using a performance device, and the presence or absence of a pseudo-continuous notice, the presence or absence of a reach performance, the content of the reach performance, etc. are stipulated.

Here, each term described in the performance structure of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 will be explained. Note that the normal variation, shortened variation, and each reach effect are as described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

"Pseudo-continuous failure" indicates that, although an inciting effect as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed is executed, the result is that the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed in the end.
"Pseudo-continuous success" indicates that an inciting effect as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed is executed, and the result is that the pseudo-continuous notice is finally executed.

"Button non-hit" means that an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 is executed in the final phase (late stage) of the corresponding reach performance, and in this operation promotion performance, the performance button 17 is operated or the performance button 17 is pressed. When the effective period of operation has elapsed, a win/loss notification effect is executed to notify whether or not it is a jackpot, but during the effective period of operation in this operation promotion effect, the effect button 17 does not move upward and is in a non-protruding state (normal state). This indicates that it will be maintained.
"Button hit" means that an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 is executed in the final phase (late stage) of the corresponding reach performance, and in this operation promotion performance, the performance button 17 is operated or the performance button 17 is operated. When the validity period has elapsed, a win/loss notification performance is executed to notify whether or not it is a jackpot, but during the operation validity period in this operation promotion performance, the performance button 17 moves upward and becomes a protruding state (special state). It shows. Note that in the following, the winning/losing notification presentation may be referred to as a "decision presentation."

"Roulette performance" means to display a plurality of development destination icons indicating development destinations (for example, loss, SP reach, heat zone, etc.) on the first image display device 70, and select one development from the plurality of development destination icons. This shows that a roulette effect is performed in which a destination icon is selected and the game is moved to the development destination indicated by the selected development destination icon.
"Zone effect" is a specific effect (background display) that is different from the normal effect (background) on the first image display device 70, and foretells that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed. This indicates that a zone effect will be performed (which makes people expect that it will be executed).
"Heat zone effect" is a specific effect (background display) that is different from the normal zone effect and foretells that the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed is higher than the normal zone effect (if the jackpot game is executed This indicates that a heat zone effect will be performed.
The "next preview" indicates that the next preview performance will be performed to foretell the type of reach performance that will be finally performed in the variable performance (in this embodiment, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance).

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that the reach effect is more likely to be executed when the pseudo continuous notice effect is executed than when the pseudo continuous notice effect is not executed. The higher the number of executions, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed or the number of times the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a second feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the performance button 17 is in a special state. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectations as to whether or not the effect button 17 will enter the special state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the third feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the effect button 17 is likely to be in a special state during the operation validity period that occurs in . By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding which type of zone effect will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a fourth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that when the next preview performance is executed, the execution of the SPSP ready-to-reach performance or the full rotation ready-to-reach performance is determined. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the next preview performance will be performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 does not include a variable effect pattern in which normal reach is performed, SP reach is performed, and SPSP reach is performed, it may be provided.

(Jackpot preview production decision process by production control department)
The jackpot preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a jackpot preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process includes a variable performance pattern determination process (a variable performance pattern based on a special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (determining process).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, the sub CPU 130a creates a preview pattern of a jackpot preview performance that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed. A jackpot notice determination table (see FIG. 29) is selected to determine the notice pattern. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. 29, multiple notice patterns (non-announcement pattern ), one notice pattern is determined. The details of the jackpot notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the preview pattern is for executing a dialogue preview effect. If the preview pattern is to execute a dialogue preview performance, the process moves to step E650-4, and if it is not a preview pattern to execute a dialogue preview performance, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Speech preview performance" means that in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period that occurs during the variable performance, a dialogue image that suggests the expectation of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device, and a voice output device This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a voice corresponding to the dialogue image is output from 9. Specifically, lines with relatively high expectations are displayed when a jackpot game is executed (high expectation of jackpot) than when a jackpot game is not executed. When a relatively highly anticipated line is displayed, the production button 17 is configured to vibrate for one second, for example.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a dialogue pattern in the dialogue preview performance, and determines the dialogue pattern. Specifically, with reference to the dialogue pattern determination table, one dialogue pattern is selected from among multiple dialogue patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue pattern. decide.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets a dialogue preview production command corresponding to the dialogue pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a line preview production command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and a line preview production according to the dialog pattern is executed, so that a dialog image is displayed on the first image display device 70. is displayed, or the audio output device 9 outputs audio corresponding to the dialogue image.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the preview pattern is for executing a step-up preview effect. If the preview pattern is to execute a step-up preview effect, the process moves to step E650-7, and if it is not a preview pattern to execute a step-up preview effect, the process moves to step E650-9.

"Step-up preview performance" is a jackpot preview performance that executes step performances in a predetermined order until reaching any of multiple steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage). It is one of a kind. Specifically, more step performances are more likely to be executed when a jackpot game is executed (the jackpot expectation level is high) than when a jackpot game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a step-up pattern in the step-up preview performance, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, with reference to the step-up pattern determination table, one step-up pattern is selected from among multiple step-up patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern. Determine step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up preview effect command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a step-up notice production command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and a step-up notice production according to the step-up pattern is executed. A step image is displayed, and a sound effect corresponding to the step image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the preview pattern is for executing a swinging preview effect. If the notice pattern is for executing a rocking notice effect, the process moves to step E650-10, and if it is not a notice pattern for executing a swing notice effect, the process moves to step E650-11.

A "swinging preview performance" is a jackpot preview in which the first movable member 73 moves from the origin position to the first performance position (see FIG. 60) and performs a performance in which it swings vertically at the first performance position. It is a type of performance. Specifically, the rocking preview effect is more likely to be executed when a jackpot game is executed (the expectation level of jackpot is high) than when a jackpot game is not executed.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a sets the swinging preview performance command in the transmission buffer, and ends the current jackpot preview performance determination process. As a result, the swinging preview performance command is sent to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the swinging preview performance is executed, and the first movable member 73 moves from the origin position to the first performance. At the first performance position, a performance of swinging in the vertical direction is performed, and a sound effect corresponding to the rocking is output. It should be noted that the rocking preview performance may also be configured to determine one of a plurality of patterns, such as a dialogue preview performance or a step-up preview performance.

In step E650-11, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern is for executing an upward notice effect. If the notice pattern is to execute an upward notice effect, the process moves to step E650-12, and if it is not a notice pattern to execute an upward notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination process is ended.

The "rising advance notice effect" is a type of jackpot advance notice effect in which the second movable member 74 moves from the origin position to the third effect position (see FIG. 68). Specifically, the increase notice effect is more likely to be executed when a jackpot game is executed (the expectation level of jackpot is high) than when a jackpot game is not executed.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the rising advance notice effect command in the transmission buffer, and ends the current jackpot advance notice effect determination process. As a result, a rising notice production command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the rising notice production is executed, and the second movable member 74 moves from the origin position to the third production position. It moves, and sound effects etc. are output according to the movement.
According to the above-described jackpot preview performance determination process, execution of a plurality of jackpot preview performances can be determined in one variable performance. The execution timings of the plurality of determined jackpot preview effects may overlap with each other. For example, the execution timings of the dialogue preview performance and the swing preview performance overlap, and the execution times of the dialogue preview performance and the rising preview performance overlap.

(Jackpot notice determination table)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a jackpot preview determination table that is referred to when determining a preview pattern for a jackpot preview performance.

The jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the selected notice pattern are associated with the jackpot notice determination table.

The notice patterns include a notice pattern with no notice, a notice pattern with a dialogue notice performance, a notice pattern with a step-up notice performance, a notice pattern with a swing notice performance, and a notice pattern with a rising notice performance. A notice pattern is set, and the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when a step-up notice, swing notice, or rising notice is executed than when a dialogue notice is executed. There is.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control section 141.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the central CPU 142, and the central CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. Specifically, it reads the main processing program from the general ROM 143, initializes flags, etc. stored in the general RAM 144, and performs processing such as initial settings.

In step T3, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts, and in step T4, refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 144 to determine whether or not a production instruction command has been received from the production control unit 130m. If it has not been received, the process moves to step T7, and if it has been received, in step T5, an animation pattern is determined and set from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command. Performs animation pattern setting processing.

The performance instruction commands include customer waiting performance command, icon display command, change performance command, preview performance command, variable performance pattern command, symbol stop pattern command, opening performance pattern command, round performance pattern command, ending performance pattern command, etc. can be mentioned.

An animation group also includes the types of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) in which the effect image is displayed, target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns whose information specifies (specifies) parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device for displaying the effect image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying a pending icon or animation of the icon, and a production pattern group for displaying a variable production animation such as a background or a character. Examples include a variable performance group, a preview performance group for displaying animations such as previews, and a special game performance group for displaying animations of special game performances.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 142 performs a sound setting process to determine and set a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command, and in step T7, updates the production image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is frame update timing (to draw a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4, and the frame switching flag is If so, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the supervising CPU 142 generates a display list made up of a group of drawing control commands, and performs display list generation/output processing to output the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and includes 1 unit, Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of multiple units (frame update timing), and in this embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process described later, drawing control commands are set according to the contents of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. Note that the drawing control commands are set in order from the anime pattern of the lowest priority anime group to the anime pattern of the highest priority anime group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the anime group to which each anime pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 142 performs drawing command processing to instruct the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output display list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and transfers the effect image drawn on the display frame buffer to the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

In step T11, the supervising CPU 142 generates a sound list composed of a group of sound control commands, and performs a sound list generation/output process of outputting the generated sound list to the audio control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is used when outputting new sounds. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 142 performs a sound output command process to instruct the audio control unit 148 to output a sound based on the output sound list. By performing this sound output command processing, the audio control unit 148 causes the audio output device 9 to output a sound based on the sound list.

Therefore, the output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization (synchronization) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and also in synchronization (synchronization) with the frame update timing. Output from the audio output device 9 is ended.

Note that although the audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds in synchronization with the frame update timing, the audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds so as not to synchronize with the frame update timing. may be stopped, or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 142 performs animation control processing to update animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. Thereafter, the processes from step T4 to step T13 are repeated in a loop.

(General control unit command reception interrupt processing)
The command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 31(a). FIG. 31(a) is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141, and this process is executed by receiving the production instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs a command reception process to receive the production instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m. Specifically, a process is performed to store the performance instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144, and the current command reception interrupt process is ended.

(V blank interrupt processing of general control unit)
The V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 31(b). FIG. 31(b) is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt processing of the general control unit 141, and the V blank interrupt processing is performed when the display of one frame of effect image is finished from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ( This is executed every time a V blank signal is received (1/30 seconds = approximately 33 ms), which is transmitted every 1/30 seconds (approximately 33 ms).

In step T30, the supervising CPU 142 performs a counter update process of updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding "1"), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( A frame buffer switching command process is performed to instruct the VDP (VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed every 1/30 seconds (approximately 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are converted into a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer". It will alternate between.

In step T32, the supervising CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt process. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes in steps T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Initial processing of accessories in the lamp/drive control section)
Accessory initial processing by the lamp/drive control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing accessory initial processing by the lamp/drive control unit 150, and this process is performed within the timer interrupt process executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the lamp/drive control unit 150. executed.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. If the power-on command has been received, the process moves to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the return-to-origin process for the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of the accessory initialization process. Set "1".

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial process number is not "1", it is assumed that the origin return process of the accessory is not executed and the process moves to step R105, and if the initial process number is "1", the origin return process is executed in step R104. and complete the initial processing of this accessory. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is returned to its original position, and the initial processing number is Perform processing such as setting it to "2". Note that the details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial processing for the accessory is not performed and the current initial processing for the accessory is terminated, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , this time the accessory initial processing ends. Specifically, processing is performed such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the accessory works normally or not, and setting the initial processing number to "0". Note that details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. It is designed so that it is not executed at the same time as action processing. By doing this, the movement of returning various accessories to their original positions and the initial movements and initial light emission of various objects do not coexist, and the return movement, initial movement, and initial light emission can be checked separately. becomes possible.

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 32, the origin return processing is executed before the initial movement processing. By doing this, the various accessories will initially move from the origin position, making it easier to understand whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Lamp/drive control unit return-to-origin processing)
The origin return process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp/drive control section 150.

In step R104-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R104-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R104-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is 1 movable member 73, and the process moves to step R104-5.

In step R104-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R104-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R104-4, the drive target to be returned to the origin is The second movable member 74 is set, and the process moves to step R104-5.

In step R104-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the original position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R104-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process moves to step R104-11.

In step R104-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R104-7, the movable member moves for a predetermined time. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the original position within a certain period of time is updated by +1.

In step R104-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process moves to step R104-9; if the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the process moves to step R104-9. , the process moves to step R104-12.

In step R104-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return error information (first movable member return error information, second movable member return error information) indicating that a return error has occurred in the movable member to be driven, in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R104-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R104-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to make the second movable member 74 the drive target, and the board accessory processing number is changed to "1". If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R104-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R104-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R104-20.

In step R104-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the production button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. When the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R104-14, and when the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process moves to step R104-19.

In step R104-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the production button drive motor for moving the production button 17 so that the production button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R104-15, the production button 17 is moved within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R104-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, and the process moves to step R104-17. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the current The return-to-origin process ends.

In step R104-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R104-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R104-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (performance button 17) to the origin.

In step R104-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R104-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R104-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R104-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number. Set "2" and end the current return-to-origin process.

As described above, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. (in the order of member 73→second movable member 74), the movable member 73 is returned to the original position. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether the various board accessories have returned to their original positions. Furthermore, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other in a manner that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent both movable members from applying loads to each other, and to prevent both movable members from being damaged at the same time. This makes it possible to suppress such inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 33, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) It is possible to perform the return operation at the same time (at the same time). By doing this, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of various accessory objects, and it becomes possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various accessory objects to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 33, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory object to return to its origin position. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories does not end forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the various accessories are performing return operations even during the variable performance and the performance operation is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 33, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) When both of the return operations are completed, processing for transitioning to initial operation processing is performed. By doing this, the return movements of various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and the return movements and initial movements of various accessories can be checked separately. becomes possible.

Note that the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed to return to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73 → second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position It is also possible to start an operation to return to . In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial motion of various accessories to be executed next. becomes.

The origin return process in FIG. 33 may be configured as follows.
In FIG. 33, if each movable member is not at the original position, it is immediately returned to the original position from that position, but it may be moved to the production position and then returned to the original position. . Alternatively, it may be moved halfway to the production position and then returned to the origin position.
In FIG. 33, when each movable member is not at the original position, it is immediately returned to the original position from that position, but the initial operation may be performed from that position without returning to the original position.
Furthermore, when a plurality of movable members are provided, the conditions for returning to the origin position described above may be different for each movable member. For example, the first movable member 73 (the movable member that attracts a lot of attention from players) that operates when a jackpot is announced is immediately returned to its original position from that position and then performs its initial operation, and the second movable member 73 that does not operate when a jackpot is announced The movable member 74 (a movable member whose attention level by the player is lower than that of the first movable member 73) may perform an initial operation from that position without returning to the original position. As a result, movable members that attract a high degree of attention from players can be reliably operated from their initial positions to prevent them from becoming inoperable due to malfunctions when a jackpot is announced, for example. On the other hand, for movable members that attract less attention from the player, the time required for the initial movement can be shortened by performing an initial movement from that position without returning to the original position.

(Initial operation processing of lamp/drive control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp/drive control section 150.

In step R106-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operating status of the board accessory is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R106-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R106-7.

In step R106-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R106-4, assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R106-3 In step R106-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2", assuming that the initial movement of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R106-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 44) for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory. Note that details of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R106-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the movement pattern.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R106-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R106-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R106-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R106-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R106-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all the initial operations of the board accessories have been completed. If all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have not been completed, the process moves to step R106-11, and if all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have been completed, in step R106-10, the board accessory Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the board accessory.

In step R106-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operating status of the frame accessory (acting button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R106-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R106-17.

In step R106-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the production button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R106-14 assuming that the initial movement of the frame accessory is to be performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame is changed in step R106-13. Assuming that the initial movement of the accessory is not performed, the frame accessory processing number is set to "2", and the process moves to step R106-17.

In step R106-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory. Note that details of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R106-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power-on command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R106-16. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R106-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R106-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R106-18. The initial motion of the frame accessory is executed in accordance with the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R106-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all steps of the initial motion of the frame accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial movement of the frame accessory have not been completed, the process moves to step R106-21, and if all steps of the initial movement of the frame accessory have been completed, in step R106-20, the process moves to step R106-20. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the frame accessory.

In step R106-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R106-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R106-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R106-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. .

In this way, according to the initial motion process shown in FIG. 34, the initial motion of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial motion of the frame accessory (production button 17) are controlled. They can be executed at the same time (at the same time). By doing this, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial movements of various accessories, and it is possible to prevent the production operations of various accessories during the game from being inhibited.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 34, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessory, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred to undergo an initial operation.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 34, if there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 forming the frame accessory, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete malfunction or damage of the performance button 17 by forcing the performance button 17 in which a return abnormality has occurred to be initially operated.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 34, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return error is performed. Even if the initial motion of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial motion of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing this, it becomes possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the operation of the accessory object in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 34, both the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (production button 17) are completed. In this case, the initial operation process ends. By doing this, even though one of the board and frame characters is performing an initial action, the other is performing a performance action, making it unclear whether it is an initial action or a performance action. will no longer occur.

(Lamp/drive control section accessory effect setting processing)
The accessory effect setting process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the accessory production setting process of the lamp/drive control unit 150, and this process is performed within the timer interrupt process executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the lamp/drive control unit 150. is executed.

In step R107, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a production instruction command has been received. If the performance instruction command has been received, the process moves to step R108, and if the performance instruction command has not been received, the current accessory performance setting process is ended.

In step R108, the lamp CPU 150a receives the variable performance pattern command among the performance instruction commands, and responds to any one of the variable performance pattern 4, the variable performance pattern 10, and the variable performance pattern 33 among the variable performance pattern commands. It is determined whether or not a variable effect pattern command has been received. If a variable effect pattern command corresponding to any of the variable effect pattern 4, the variable effect pattern 10, and the variable effect pattern 33 has been received, the process moves to step R109, and the variable effect pattern 4, the variable effect pattern 10, If a variable effect pattern command corresponding to any of the variable effect patterns 33 has not been received, the process moves to step R111.

In step R109, the lamp CPU 150a sets the first movable member 73 as the driving target and performs processing for moving the first movable member 73 from the origin position to the presentation position. In addition, in the variable performance pattern 4, the variable performance pattern 10, and the variable performance pattern 33, the first movable member 73 is moved to the "B" point (first performance position, see FIG. 60, etc.), and the first movable member 73 is moved to the "B" point. By swinging the first movable member 73 at the (first effect position), a pseudo-continuous agitation for agitating the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous notice is executed.
For example, in case of variation effect pattern 4, "pseudo continuous failure" is executed (see Figure 27), so pseudo continuous incitement is executed but pseudo continuous notice is not performed, and the variation In production pattern 10, since a "pseudo successive success" is executed (see FIG. 27), a pseudo continuous promotion is executed and a pseudo consecutive notice is given.
Therefore, in this process, in order to cause the first movable member 73 to perform pseudo continuous stirring, the number of steps of the motor related to movement from the origin position to point "B" and the number of steps of the motor related to swinging are set. .

In step R110, the lamp CPU 150a turns on the pseudo-continuation execution flag. Specifically, in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c, the pseudo-continuation execution flag is turned ON. The flag is referenced in the later-described accessory performance execution process of the lamp/drive control unit (see FIG. 36), and when the execution timing of the pseudo-continuation excitement comes, the first movable member 73 executes the flag based on the content set in step R109. It works.

In step R111, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a preview effect command indicating a swing preview effect among the effect instruction commands has been received. If a preview performance command indicating a swinging preview performance has been received, the process moves to step R112, and if a preview performance command indicating a swinging preview performance has not been received, the process moves to step R114.

In step R112, the lamp CPU 150a sets the first movable member 73 as the driving target and performs processing for moving the first movable member 73 from the origin position to the presentation position. Note that the rocking preview performance is performed by moving the first movable member 73 to point "B" (first performance position, see FIG. 60, etc.), and moving the first movable member 73 at the "B" point (first performance position). 73, so in this process, in order to cause the first movable member 73 to perform the rocking notice performance, the number of steps of the motor related to movement from the origin position to point "B" and the rocking motion are Set the number of steps for the motor.

In step R113, the lamp CPU 150a turns on the swinging preview effect execution flag. Specifically, in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c, a swinging preview effect execution flag is turned ON. The flag is referenced in the later-described accessory effect execution process of the lamp/drive control unit (see FIG. 36), and when the timing for executing the swinging preview effect comes, the first movable member 73 changes to the content set in step R112. operate based on

In step R114, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a preview performance command indicating an upward preview performance among the performance instruction commands has been received. If a preview performance command indicating an upward advance notice performance has been received, the process moves to step R115, and if a preview performance command indicating an upward advance notice performance has not been received, the process moves to step R117.

In step R115, the lamp CPU 150a sets the second movable member 74 as the driving target and performs processing for moving the second movable member 74 from the origin position to the presentation position. In addition, the rising notice performance is performed by moving the second movable member 74 to the "E" point (third performance position, see FIG. 68, etc.), and at the "E" point (third performance position), the second movable member (rotating Since the effect is to rotate the body 74a), in this process, in order to cause the second movable member 74 to perform an upward advance notice effect, the number of steps of the motor related to movement from the origin position to the point "E" and the second movable member 74 are changed. The number of steps of the motor related to the rotation of the section (rotating body 74a) is set.

In step R116, the lamp CPU 150a turns on the rising advance notice effect execution flag. Specifically, in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c, an upward advance notice performance execution flag is turned ON. The flag is referred to in the later-described accessory effect execution process of the lamp/drive control unit (see FIG. 36), and when the execution timing of the rising notice effect comes, the second movable member 74 executes the flag based on the content set in step R115. It works.

In step R117, the lamp CPU 150a receives the variable performance pattern command among the performance instruction commands, and selects any one of the variable performance patterns 31 to 47 (i.e., the jackpot variable performance) among the variable performance pattern commands. It is determined whether or not a variable effect pattern command corresponding to the pattern) has been received. If a variable performance pattern command corresponding to any of the variable performance patterns 31 to 47 has been received, the process moves to step R118, and the process corresponds to any of the variable performance patterns 31 to 47. If the variable effect pattern command has not been received, the process moves to step R122.

In step R118, the lamp CPU 150a sets the first movable member 73 as the driving target and performs processing for moving the first movable member 73 from the origin position to the presentation position. In addition, in the variable performance pattern 31 to variable performance pattern 47, the first movable member 73 is moved to the "C" point (second performance position, see FIG. 60, etc.) in the decisive performance to notify whether or not there is a jackpot. It is designed to notify you of a jackpot.
Therefore, in this process, the number of steps of the motor related to movement from the origin position to point "C" is set in order to cause the first movable member 73 to notify the jackpot.

The lamp CPU 150a turns on the jackpot notification execution flag in step R119. Specifically, a jackpot notification execution flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. The flag is referred to in the later-described role performance execution process of the lamp/drive control unit (see FIG. 36), and when the execution timing of jackpot notification (decision performance) comes, the first movable member 73 sets it in step R118. Acts on content.

In step R120, the lamp CPU 150a sets the driving target to the third movable member (effect button 17), and performs processing for vibrating the third movable member (presentation button 17). In addition, in the variable performance pattern 31 to variable performance pattern 47, a jackpot is notified by vibrating the third movable member (performance button 17) for 5 seconds during the validity period for the fixed performance to notify whether or not it is a jackpot. It has become.
Therefore, in this process, the number of steps of the motor related to the 5-second vibration is set in order to cause the third movable member (performance button 17) to notify the jackpot.

In step R121, the lamp CPU 150a turns on the button vibration 1 execution flag. Specifically, the button vibration 1 execution flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. The flag is referred to in the later-described role performance execution process of the lamp/drive control unit (see FIG. 36), and when the execution timing of jackpot notification (decision performance) comes, the third movable member (performance button 17) steps. It operates (vibrates) based on the settings set in R120.

In step R122, the lamp CPU 150a receives the variable performance pattern command among the performance instruction commands, and also receives the variable performance pattern 16 to variable performance pattern 22 and the variable performance pattern 39 to variable performance pattern 45 among the variable performance pattern commands. It is determined whether or not a variable effect pattern command corresponding to any one of the above (that is, a variable effect pattern that performs SPSP reach) is received. If a variable performance pattern command corresponding to any of the variable performance patterns 16 to 22 and the variable performance patterns 39 to 45 has been received, the process moves to step R123, and the variable performance patterns 16 to 45 are received. If a variable performance pattern command corresponding to any of the variable performance pattern 22 and the variable performance patterns 39 to 45 has not been received, the process moves to step R125.

In step R123, the lamp CPU 150a sets the second movable member 74 as the driving target and performs processing for moving the second movable member 74 from the origin position to the presentation position. In addition, in the variable performance pattern 16 to variable performance pattern 22 and the variable performance pattern 39 to variable performance pattern 45, after once notifying the loss in the normal reach, the second movable member 74 is moved to the "E" point (third performance position, Fig. 68, etc.) and rotate the second movable part (rotating body 74a) at the "E" point (third performance position) to execute a development performance that notifies that SPSP reach has developed. It has become.
Therefore, in this process, in order to cause the second movable member 74 to perform the development effect, the number of steps of the motor related to movement from the origin position to point "E" and the rotation of the second movable part (rotating body 74a) are changed. Set the number of motor steps.

The lamp CPU 150a turns on the advanced effect execution flag in step R124. Specifically, the advanced effect execution flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. The flag is referred to in the later-described accessory effect execution process of the lamp/drive control unit (see FIG. 36), and when the execution timing of the advanced effect comes, the second movable member 74 executes the flag based on the content set in step R123. Operate.

In step R125, the lamp CPU 150a receives the variable performance pattern command among the performance instruction commands, and also receives the variable performance pattern command corresponding to either the variable performance pattern 17 or the variable performance pattern 47 among the variable performance pattern commands. is received. If a variable effect pattern command corresponding to either the variable effect pattern 17 or the variable effect pattern 47 has been received, the process moves to step R126, and the process corresponds to either the variable effect pattern 17 or the variable effect pattern 47. If the variable performance pattern command has not been received, the current accessory performance setting process is ended.

In step R126, the lamp CPU 150a sets the driving target to the third movable member (effect button 17) and performs processing for vibrating the third movable member (presentation button 17). In addition, in the variable performance pattern 17 and the variable performance pattern 47, the third movable member (performance button 17) is vibrated for 1 second during the validity period for the jackpot notice (for example, at the start of the variation) to make you expect a jackpot. I am trying to make people expect that they will hit the jackpot.
Therefore, in this process, the number of steps of the motor related to the one-second vibration is set in order to cause the third movable member (presentation button 17) to execute a jackpot notice that makes the player expect a jackpot.

In step R127, the lamp CPU 150a turns on the button vibration 2 execution flag. Specifically, the button vibration 2 execution flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. The flag is referred to in the later-described role performance execution process of the lamp/drive control unit (see FIG. 36), and when the validity period for jackpot notice (for example, at the start of fluctuation) is reached, the third movable member (performance button 17) operates (vibrates) based on the contents set in step R126.

(Role effect execution processing of lamp/drive control unit)
The accessory effect execution process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the accessory production execution process of the lamp/drive control unit 150, and this process is performed within the timer interrupt process executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the lamp/drive control unit 150. It is executed after the accessory production setting process.

In step R125, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the pseudo-continuation execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the pseudo-coupling execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R126, and if the pseudo-coupling execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R129.

In step R126, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the execution timing has arrived. If the execution timing has come, the process moves to step R127, and if the execution timing has not arrived, the process moves to step R129.

In addition, in FIG. 36, in determining whether or not the execution timing has arrived, the time from the start of the variable performance is managed, and when it is time to execute the predetermined pseudo-continuous incitement, the execution timing is determined. Alternatively, you can manage the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect (for example, 30 frames per second), and when the number of display frames reaches a predetermined number for executing the pseudo continuous incitement, it is the execution timing. You may conclude that.

In step R127, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R128, turns off the pseudo continuous stirring execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the first movable member 73 moves to point “B” (first presentation position, see FIG. 66, etc.), and the first movable member 73 swings at the “B” point (first presentation position). Pseudo-linked agitation will be carried out.

In step R129, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the rocking preview effect execution flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the rocking preview performance execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R130, and if the rocking preview performance execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R133.

In step R130, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the execution timing has arrived. When the execution timing has come, the process moves to step R131, and when the execution timing has not arrived, the process moves to step R133.

In step R131, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R132, turns off the rocking preview performance execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the first movable member 73 moves to point “B” (first presentation position, see FIG. 60, etc.), and the first movable member 73 swings at the “B” point (first presentation position). A rocking preview performance will be performed.

In step R133, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the rising advance notice performance execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. When the rising advance notice effect execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R134, and when the upward advance notice effect execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R137.

In step R134, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the execution timing has arrived. If the execution timing has come, the process moves to step R135, and if the execution timing has not arrived, the process moves to step R137.

In step R135, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R136, turns off the rising advance notice effect execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the second movable member 74 moves to point "E" (third performance position, see FIG. 68, etc.), and the rising preview performance in which the second movable part (rotating body 74a) rotates is executed. Become.

In step R137, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the jackpot notification execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the jackpot notification execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R138, and if the jackpot notification execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R141.

In step R138, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the execution timing has arrived. When the execution timing has come, the process moves to step R139, and when the execution timing has not arrived, the process moves to step R141.

In step R139, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R140, turns off the jackpot notification execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the first movable member 73 moves to the "C" point (second performance position, see FIG. 60, etc.) and the jackpot notification is executed.

In step R141, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the button vibration 1 execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the button vibration 1 execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R142, and if the button vibration 1 execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R145.

In step R142, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the execution timing has arrived. When the execution timing has come, the process moves to step R143, and when the execution timing has not arrived, the process moves to step R145.

In step R143, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R144, turns off the button vibration 1 execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the third movable member (presentation button 17) vibrates for 5 seconds and jackpot notification is executed.

In step R145, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the advanced effect execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the advanced effect execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R146, and if the expanded effect execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R149.

In step R146, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the execution timing has arrived. If the execution timing has come, the process moves to step R147, and if the execution timing has not arrived, the process moves to step R149.

In step R147, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R148, turns off the development performance execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the second movable member 74 moves to the "E" point (third production position, see FIG. 62, etc.) and the second movable part (rotating body 74a) rotates, thereby notifying that SPSP reach has developed. The development performance will be executed.

In step R149, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the button vibration 2 execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the button vibration 2 execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R150, and if the button vibration 2 execution flag is not ON, the current accessory effect execution process is ended.

In step R150, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the execution timing has arrived. If it is the execution timing, the process moves to step R151, and if it is not the execution timing, the current accessory performance execution process is ended.

In step R151, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R152, turns off the button vibration 2 execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the third movable member (presentation button 17) vibrates for one second, and a jackpot notice is executed to make the player expect a jackpot.

(First modification)
The first modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. Note that the first modification differs from the first embodiment in that the RWM clear processing continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again, so only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be explained using FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the production control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for notifying RWM clear preparation.

"RWM clear preparation notification" refers to displaying a clear preparation screen on the image display device to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or notifying the audio output device 9 of "Please press the RWM clear switch again". This means outputting audio over a predetermined period of time.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (gaming program) in step S24-2. Specifically, RWM clears various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses. Processing for initial operation is performed until the preparation mode ends. Note that details regarding the initial operations of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and RWM clear is performed and the process moves to step S24-4; if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24-2. Transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c other than the set value area. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the gaming RWM area before RWM clearing is not carried over.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S24-5. Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that RWM clear has been performed.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process to end the RWM clear preparation notification described above.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode is ended by the RWM clear approval operation, and ends the current RWM clear processing.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation)
A specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second Various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b) for operating the starting port opening/closing member 48, big winning opening/closing member 51) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (big winning hole 50) to emit light in a predetermined manner during a round game is off, and the main information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 60, The special symbol display device 61, etc.), the first image display device 70, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that RWM clear preparation is in progress is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, RWM clear preparation notifications (display of the RWM clear preparation screen, notification voice "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Solenoid operation "Please confirm" is started (alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice).

It should be noted that at timing T1, the first image display device 70 starts "Preparing for RWM clear" (displaying the RWM clear preparation screen), but the first image display device 70 notifies that the initial operations of various drive sources are being performed. You may start displaying.
For example, the first image display device 70 may display the message "Initial operation of the drive source" and may alternately or simultaneously display the message "Preparing to clear RWM".
In addition, when the initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid" is being output, the first image display device 70 displays "Initial operation of the drive source", and the message "Please check the operation of the solenoid" is displayed on the first image display device 70. If the initial operation confirmation voice "please do the initial operation" is not output, the display "drive source initial operation in progress" may not be displayed.
With the above configuration, it is possible to prompt the user to confirm the operation of the various drive sources not only by sound but also by display, so that the user can pay attention to confirming the operation of the various drive sources.

At timing T2, when the operation time (here 0.512 seconds) has elapsed from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the timing from T3 to T10 The activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until

At timing T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and RWM clear preparation are performed. When the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the pre-start state. Transition to possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display device 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) controlled by the performance control board 130 is started, and all 7 segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are All lights are turned on and lighting confirmation begins. Note that the initial operation of the movable performance device ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In addition, at the timing of T10, the above-mentioned power-on command (power-on designation command or power restoration designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130, and the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. Based on the reception by the board 130, the initial operation of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is started. That is, the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in the example of FIG. 38 depends on the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110.
In other words, even if power is supplied to the production control board 130 from the power supply board 160, if the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110 is not received, the movable production device (first movable member 73, 2 movable member 74) will not start.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 started, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

Note that the 5-second lighting confirmation (operation) of the information display 113 performed from the timing T10 to the timing T11 can be said to be the initial operation of the information display 113. That is, in the example of FIG. 38, initial operations of various drive sources are performed from timing T1 to timing T10, then initial operations of the information display 113 are performed from timing T10 to timing T11, and then from timing T10 to timing T10. The initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 12 or 2 seconds) from the timing.
That is, in the example of FIG. 38, the initial operations of the various drive sources overlap in execution timing with the initial operations of the information display 113 and the initial operations of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). Rather, the initial operation of the information display 113 and the initial operation of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) overlap in execution timing.

As described above, according to the present modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the big winning opening opening/closing member 51) that influence the result of the game are ) to operate the various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b), the game machine 1 (game board 5 only, board unit 500 only) is initially activated. Checking the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory or when replacing it at the game parlor (including replacing only the game board 5 or the board unit 500) It becomes possible to do this easily.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main Since the information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, etc.) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, unnecessary processing burden is not applied to the main control board 110. At the same time, it becomes possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

Further, according to this modification, initial operations of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are performed in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, and the game progress control is performed. Since the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is designed to perform an initial operation that does not affect the result of the game in the game-enabled state, two types of initial operations are performed in order. It is possible to check the operation appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, initial operations of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are performed in a pre-start state before game progress control is performed, and then the game progress is Since the initial operation of the information display 113 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the game-enabled state where control is performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation check can be performed appropriately. can be done. In particular, the initial operations of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are performed independently to avoid overlapping execution timing with other initial operations, so that abnormalities in various drive sources can be detected. It is possible to prevent overlooking whether or not a problem has occurred, and to prevent a disadvantage from being given to a player.

In addition, in the playable state where the progress of the game is controlled, the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that does not affect the result of the game, and the initial operation that does not affect the result of the game. Since the initial operation of the information display device 113, which is not available, is performed at the same time, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the big winning opening opening/closing member 51 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED remains off, so that there is no light from the big winning opening LED. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the big prize opening opening/closing member 51 due to light, and it becomes possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the big winning opening/closing member 51 are initially operated, an open signal is output even though the big winning opening 50 is open. Therefore, it is possible to avoid placing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and the information collection device such as the hall computer that collects information output from the gaming machine 1 can monitor the progress of the game. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not meet the requirements.

Furthermore, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 until the gaming progress control is started after the gaming machine is powered on (the performance information is not displayed). Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110.

In addition, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of performance information is allowed), so the game It is possible to confirm whether or not progress control has been started, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

Furthermore, according to this modification, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. By doing so, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience for the game parlor side can be ensured.

In addition, in this modification, when setting change notification in setting change mode, a setting change screen was displayed that displayed the words "Settings changing", but in addition to the words "Settings changing" Then, a settings change screen may be displayed that displays the words "Driving source initial operation in progress" or "Please check solenoid operation" to prompt visual confirmation of the initial operation of the various driving sources.

(Operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 39, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, auxiliary game in the non-time-saving game state Compare the operations in the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state).

The driving time for one operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the non-time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation during the non-time-saving gaming state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, even if the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b for one time during the initial operation is set to the same value or almost the same (similar) value as the driving time for one time during the auxiliary game operation during the non-time saving game state. good. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the non-time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. becomes.

Moreover, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b for one time during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the driving time for one time during the auxiliary game operation during the non-time-saving gaming state. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b for one time during the initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time for one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. . In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b for one time during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time for one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time for one time of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time for one time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether or not the jackpot opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the jackpot game operation, thereby making it possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Furthermore, the driving time of the big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for one time during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time for one time during the jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether or not the jackpot opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the jackpot game operation, thereby making it possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(Second modification)
The second modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. Note that the second modified example does not have a setting change function or a setting confirmation function, does not have a status confirmation display 68, and RWM clear processing continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. Since this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be explained here.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 in the second modification will be described using FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. Note that only the different parts will be explained below.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (gaming program) in step S24. Specifically, RWM clears various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses. Processing for initial operation is performed until the preparation mode ends. Note that details regarding the initial operations of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and RWM clear is performed, and the process moves to step S26. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources, and in step S27, initializes (clears to 0) the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the gaming RWM area before RWM clearing is not carried over.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S28. Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that RWM clear has been performed.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the non-time saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 120 and the production control. The information is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second Various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b) for operating the starting port opening/closing member 48, big winning opening/closing member 51) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (big winning hole 50) to emit light in a predetermined manner during a round game is off, and the main information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 60, The special symbol display device 61, etc.), the first image display device 70, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, the various drive sources start to operate (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, RWM clear preparation notifications (display of the RWM clear preparation screen, notification voice "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Solenoid operation "Please confirm" is started (alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice). In addition, in FIG. 41 as well, as described in FIG. 38, the first image display device 70 may display "Driving source initial operation in progress".

At timing T2, when the operation time (here 0.512 seconds) has elapsed from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the timing from T3 to T10 The activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until

At timing T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and RWM clear preparation are performed. When the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the pre-start state. Transition to possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display device 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) controlled by the performance control board 130 is started, and all 7 segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are All lights are turned on and lighting confirmation begins. Note that the initial operation of the movable performance device ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In addition, at the timing of T10, the above-mentioned power-on command (power-on designation command or power restoration designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130, and the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. Based on the reception by the board 130, the initial operation of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is started. That is, the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in the example of FIG. 41 depends on the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110.
In other words, even if power is supplied to the production control board 130 from the power supply board 160, if the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110 is not received, the movable production device (first movable member 73, 2 movable member 74) will not start.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 started, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

Note that the 5-second lighting confirmation (operation) of the information display 113 performed from the timing T10 to the timing T11 can be said to be the initial operation of the information display 113. That is, in the example of FIG. 41, initial operations of various drive sources are performed from timing T1 to timing T10, and then initial operations of the information display 113 are performed from timing T10 to timing T11, and then from timing T10 to T10. The initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 12 or 2 seconds) from the timing.
That is, in the example of FIG. 41, the initial operations of the various drive sources overlap in execution timing with the initial operations of the information display 113 and the initial operations of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). Rather, the initial operation of the information display 113 and the initial operation of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) overlap in execution timing.

As described above, according to the present modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the big winning opening opening/closing member 51) that influence the result of the game are ) to operate the various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b), the game machine 1 (game board 5 only, board unit 500 only) is initially activated. Checking the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory or when replacing it at the game parlor (including replacing only the game board 5 or the board unit 500) It becomes possible to do this easily.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display device 59 (the first Since the special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, etc.) are kept in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being applied to the main control board 110, and also to prevent various drive This makes it possible to concentrate on checking the operation of the source.

Furthermore, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initially operated, it is possible to confirm that RWM clearing is being prepared and to check the operation of the various drive sources. Since the RWM clear preparation notification is made to prompt the operator, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game store clerk) who is checking the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources. This makes it possible to properly check the operation.

Furthermore, according to this modification, in the RWM clear preparation mode, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated, so that control of the progress of the game is started. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the previous pre-start state, and it is possible to reduce the development cost (shorten the development period, etc.) of the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, according to this modification, when the pre-start state ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. Therefore, the initial operation of the various drive sources is not performed in a game ready state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusion with the operation of the various drive sources in accordance with the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, initial operations of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are performed in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, and the game progress control is performed. Since the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is designed to perform an initial operation that does not affect the result of the game in the game-enabled state, two types of initial operations are performed in order. It is possible to check the operation appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, initial operations of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are performed in a pre-start state before game progress control is performed, and then the game progress is Since the initial operation of the information display 113 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state where control is performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation check can be performed appropriately. can be done. In particular, the initial operations of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are performed independently to avoid overlapping execution timing with other initial operations, so that abnormalities in various drive sources can be detected. It is possible to prevent overlooking whether or not a problem has occurred, and to prevent a disadvantage from being given to a player.

In addition, in the playable state where the progress of the game is controlled, the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that does not affect the result of the game, and the initial operation that does not affect the result of the game. Since the initial operation of the information display device 113, which is not available, is performed at the same time, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Moreover, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the big winning opening opening/closing member 51 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED remains off, so that the large winning opening LED remains off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the big prize opening opening/closing member 51 due to light, and it becomes possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the big winning opening/closing member 51 are initially operated, an open signal is output even though the big winning opening 50 is open. Therefore, it is possible to avoid placing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and the information collection device such as the hall computer that collects information output from the gaming machine 1 can monitor the progress of the game. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not meet the requirements.

Furthermore, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 until the gaming progress control is started after the gaming machine is powered on (the performance information is not displayed). Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110.

In addition, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of performance information is allowed), so the game It is possible to confirm whether or not progress control has been started, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, in this modification, in the RWM clear preparation notification in the RWM clear preparation mode, a clear preparation screen was displayed that displayed the words "Preparing to clear RWM", but instead of "Preparing to clear RWM". Even if a clear preparation screen is displayed in addition to the text, the text ``Initial operation of drive source'' or ``Please check solenoid operation'' is displayed to prompt visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources. good.

In addition, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, auxiliary game in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) provided in the board unit 500 in the second modification example The comparison of the operations (auxiliary game operations in the time-saving gaming state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 39, so the explanation here will be omitted.

In addition, the scene in which the initial operation of the various drive sources (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) is performed is not limited to the example of FIG. 38 or the example of FIG. 41, but may be the following scenes.
For example, the initial operation may be started when the settings are changed and the settings key switch 112a is turned off.
For example, the initial operation may be started when the settings are confirmed and the setting key switch 112a is turned off.
For example, the initial operation may be started when an operation necessary to change the settings is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on). In this case, the initial operation may be continued while the settings are being changed (when the setting key switch 112a is ON).
For example, the initial operation may be started when an operation necessary to confirm the settings is performed (setting key switch 112a is turned on). In this case, the initial operation may be continued while the setting confirmation is being performed (when the setting key switch 112a is ON).
For example, the initial operation may be started when an RWM clear approval operation is performed (in a gaming machine that does not have settings).
For example, the initial operation may be started when the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on (in a gaming machine that does not have settings).

(Modified example of the specific example (Fig. 38) when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation)
A modification of the specific example (FIG. 38) in which various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation will be described using FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.
Note that only the points that are different from FIG. 38 will be explained with emphasis, and the explanation of the overlapping parts will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 42, the descriptions of "Settings confirmation mode" and "Big prize opening LED" that were described in FIG. This is the same as in FIG. 38 in that the winning a prize opening LED is OFF from beginning to end.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second Various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b) for operating the starting port opening/closing member 48, big winning opening/closing member 51) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (big winning hole 50) to emit light in a predetermined manner during a round game is off, and the main information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 60, The special symbol display device 61, etc.), the first image display device 70, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that RWM clear preparation is in progress is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, RWM clear preparation notifications (display of the RWM clear preparation screen, notification voice "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Solenoid operation "Please confirm" is started (alternate output of initial operation confirmation voice). Note that in FIG. 42 as well, as described with reference to FIG. 38, the first image display device 70 may display "drive source initial operation in progress."

Furthermore, at the timing T1, the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ) starts its initial operation. That is, the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in the example of FIG. 42 does not depend on the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110.
In other words, as long as the production control board 130 is supplied with power from the power supply board 160, the movable production device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ) can start the initial operation.

Note that at the timing T1, the initial operation of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is started, so as shown in FIG. The initial operation of the movable production device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed in front of the "Middle" display (display of the RWM clear preparation screen).
Therefore, the "Preparing to clear RWM" display (display of the RWM clear preparing screen) on the first image display device 70 becomes difficult to see, so the "Preparing to clear RWM" display (display of the RWM clear preparing screen) It may be displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the initial operation range of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). For example, it may be displayed at the upper left or upper right of the display area. As a result, the "RWM clear preparation in progress" display (display of the RWM clear preparation screen) does not become difficult to see, and it is possible to clearly recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress.
Note that when the first image display device 70 displays "initial operation of the drive source", the operation range overlaps with the initial operation range of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). All you have to do is display it in a display area that is not used. This makes it possible to clearly recognize that the initial operation of the drive source is being performed.

At timing T2, when the operation time (here 0.512 seconds) has elapsed from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the timing from T3 to T10 The activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until

Similar to FIG. 38, the time required for the initial operation of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is, for example, "12.2 seconds".
In other words, in the example of FIG. 42, the initial operations of the various drive sources and the initial operations of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are started from the timing T1. The execution timing of the initial operation of the source and the execution timing of the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) overlap.
Further, the initial operations of the various drive sources are executed from the timing T1 to the timing T10, and the initial operation of the information display 113 is started from the timing T10.
Therefore, although the execution timing of the initial operations of various drive sources and the execution timing of the initial operations of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) overlap, the execution timing of the initial operation of the information display 113 overlaps. does not overlap with these and is executed independently.

In the example shown in FIG. 42, for example, first, the initial operations of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operations of various drive sources performed on the game board surface are simultaneously confirmed. Thereafter, the RWM clear approval operation is completed, and the initial operation of the information display 113 can be confirmed. In other words, the necessary work (initial operation check) to be performed on the front side of the gaming machine 1 (on the game board surface) is completed all at once, and then the necessary work to be performed on the rear side of the gaming machine 1 (completion of RWM clear approval operation) , initial operation confirmation) can be completed all at once. Therefore, time efficiency related to the above-mentioned necessary work can be improved.

For example, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed at timing T4, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), and the initial operation of various drive sources is However, the initial operation of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) does not end, and ends at timing T9.
In this case, the initial operation of the information display 113 will start at timing T4 when the various drive sources have stopped operating (drive source = OFF) and the initial operations of the various drive sources have finished, so there may be exceptions. , the execution timing of the initial operation of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the execution timing of the initial operation of the information display device 113 may overlap.

(Modified example of the specific example (Fig. 41) when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation)
A modification of the specific example (FIG. 41) in which various drive sources are initially operated after RWM clearing will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.
Note that only the points that are different from FIG. 41 will be explained with emphasis, and the explanation of the overlapping parts will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 43, the description of the "big winning hole LED" that was described in FIG. 41 is omitted, but the point that the "big winning hole LED" is OFF from beginning to end is the same as in FIG. 41.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (second Various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b) for operating the starting port opening/closing member 48, big winning opening/closing member 51) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (big winning hole 50) to emit light in a predetermined manner during a round game is off, and the main information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 60, The special symbol display device 61, etc.), the first image display device 70, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, the various drive sources start to operate (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, RWM clear preparation notifications (display of the clear preparation screen, notification voice "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm solenoid operation Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice "Please do so" will begin. In addition, in FIG. 43 as well, as described in FIG. 38, the first image display device 70 may display "Driving source initial operation in progress".

Furthermore, at the timing T1, the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ) starts its initial operation. That is, the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in the example of FIG. 43 does not depend on the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110.
In other words, as long as the production control board 130 is supplied with power from the power supply board 160, the movable production device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ) can start the initial operation. In addition, in FIG. 43, as described in FIG. 42, the "RWM clear preparation in progress" display (display of the RWM clear preparation screen) is changed to the initial operation of the movable production device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). It may also be displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the operating range of . Also, when displaying "drive source initial operation in progress" on the first image display device 70, similarly, the operation range overlaps with the initial operation range of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). All you have to do is display it in a display area that is not used.

Similar to FIG. 41, the time required for the initial operation of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is, for example, "12.2 seconds".
In other words, in the example of FIG. 43, the initial operations of the various drive sources and the initial operations of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are started from the timing T1. The execution timing of the initial operation of the source and the execution timing of the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) overlap.
Further, the initial operations of the various drive sources are executed from the timing T1 to the timing T10, and the initial operation of the information display 113 is started from the timing T10.
Therefore, although the execution timing of the initial operations of various drive sources and the execution timing of the initial operations of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) overlap, the execution timing of the initial operation of the information display 113 overlaps. does not overlap with these and is executed independently.

In the example of FIG. 43, for example, first, the initial operations of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operations of various drive sources performed on the game board surface are simultaneously confirmed. Thereafter, the RWM clear approval operation is completed, and the initial operation of the information display 113 can be confirmed. In other words, the necessary work (initial operation check) to be performed on the front side of the gaming machine 1 (on the game board surface) is completed all at once, and then the necessary work to be performed on the rear side of the gaming machine 1 (completion of RWM clear approval operation) , initial operation confirmation) can be completed all at once. Therefore, time efficiency related to the above-mentioned necessary work can be improved.

In addition, in FIG. 43 as well, the execution timing of the initial operation of the movable presentation device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the execution timing of the initial operation of the information display device 113 described in FIG. 42 overlap. Exceptions may occur.

In addition, the scene in which the initial operation of the various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) is performed is not limited to the example of FIG. 42 or the example of FIG. 43, but may be the following scene.
For example, the initial operation may be started when the settings are changed and the settings key switch 112a is turned off.
For example, the initial operation may be started when the settings are confirmed and the setting key switch 112a is turned off.
For example, the initial operation may be started when an operation necessary to change the settings is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on). In this case, the initial operation may be continued while the settings are being changed (when the setting key switch 112a is ON).
For example, the initial operation may be started when an operation necessary to confirm the settings is performed (setting key switch 112a is turned on). In this case, the initial operation may be continued while the setting confirmation is being performed (when the setting key switch 112a is ON).
For example, the initial operation may be started when an RWM clear approval operation is performed (in a gaming machine that does not have settings).
For example, the initial operation may be started when the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on (in a gaming machine that does not have settings).

(Board accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of power-on command, the presence or absence of return error information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected.For reference, the operation mode at the initial operation and the initial operation The number of steps is listed.

Initial operation patterns include patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the device is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns determined when receiving patterns 04 to 06, the second power recovery designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or the third power recovery designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

Furthermore, lighting (light emission) patterns of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are set in each initial operation pattern. For example, in the initial operation pattern 01, a lighting (light emission) pattern is set in which the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white, and the second movable member LED lights up (lights in blue and white). There is.
Note that in FIG. 44, lighting up (light emission) in blue and white means that the LED lights up (lights up) in the order of blue → white → blue → white alternately.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin After the second movable member 74 operates in the ascending position, the second movable member 74 rotates for a predetermined time at the elevated position, and then stops and returns to the origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to blue and white. The lights will light up (light up) alternately. Note that the required time for "Initial operation pattern 01" is "12.2 seconds".
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73, and after the second movable member 74 rotates from raised to raised position for a predetermined time without the first movable member 73 operating. It operates in the order of stop → return to origin, and during that period, the second movable member LED alternately lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and during that period, the first movable member LED alternately lights up (lights up) in blue and white.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue. This is the same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and since the second movable member LED does not light up in blue, it is ultimately the same as initial operation pattern 03.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and except for the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED being turned off, This is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04.
“Initial operation pattern 08” is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 or initial operation pattern 05 except that the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 03 or initial operation pattern 06 except that the first movable member 73 is turned off.

Note that in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the component LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described, but this point is caused by the return abnormality of the second movable member 74. This is because the component LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that the board accessory One point is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of (the first movable member, the second movable member) is the same. By doing this, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

In addition, the movement mode of the initial movement is the same as long as at least the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is the same, the movement time in each process may be the same, or the movement time in each process is the same. May be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operations of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be made different. In this way, it is possible to easily determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

In addition, when the initial operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, it is possible to An operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). It becomes possible.

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or whether it is the initial operation due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or whether it is the initial operation due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

It should be noted that while the light emitting manner of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state, the light emitting manner of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Furthermore, both the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state. Good too. In this way, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to the power being restored (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or whether it is the initial operation due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored when the special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation or during a jackpot game. The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different between the two. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power restoration returning to the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the power restoration restoring while the special symbol is changing, or during a jackpot game. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the power is restored during the changing display of special symbols or during a jackpot game, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off, but the first movable member LED The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emitting manner as when the power is restored to the customer waiting state.

A sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When there is no return abnormality in the movable member 74, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73, the second movable member If there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a recovery abnormality.

Note that the lighting (light emission) pattern of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED in the board accessory initial operation pattern shown in FIG. 44 may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the initial motion of the board accessory, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change in the order of red → green → blue, as in the frame accessory initial motion pattern 01 (see FIG. 45) described later. There may be a lighting (light emission) pattern in which the light is turned on (light emission).

(Frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (production button 17).

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps for the initial operation are listed for reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration (2 seconds) → return to origin → intermittent vibration (2 seconds). , During that period, the performance button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power recovery designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the production button is raised in the order of large rise & continuous vibration (2 seconds) → return to origin The production button lights up (lights up) in blue during that period.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when a second power restoration designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received; The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration (2 seconds) → return to origin, and the production button LED turns off during this period.

In addition, the continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the production button 17 are executed by operating the production button 17 during the valid period that occurs during the execution of the variable production. The time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance (1 second vibration if it is a valid period for a jackpot notice that makes you expect a jackpot, 5 seconds if it is a valid period for a decisive performance that announces whether or not it is a jackpot) The time is different from the second oscillation).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the frame accessory The difference is in the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of (production button 17). By doing this, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes possible.

The second feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the initial movement of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on performs an operation that is not present in the initial movement of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One of the points is that it is designed to allow By doing this, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes possible.

Note that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the production button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference lies in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or whether it is the initial operation due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or whether it is the initial operation due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

In addition, the performance button LED is designed to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during a jackpot game, but this is the same as when the power is restored to restore the performance button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be made to light up in a light emitting manner.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the numbers are different. By doing this, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes possible.

Note that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted light colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it includes luminescent colors that are not present in other models. By doing this, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes possible.

Note that the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a light emitting color that is not included in the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. This differs from the time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance performed when the button 17 is operated. By doing this, it becomes possible to understand that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the process is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 17 in which the detection of the process is performed. By doing this, the operation of the production button 17 and the button vibration motor can be checked at the same time, and the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) after power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission. do.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses at timing T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At timing T9, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T10, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality, and the initial The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When the first special symbol storage designation command based on winning (first pending number = 1) is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. At the same time as the first hold icon is displayed, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the first movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. The second movable member 74 starts blinking in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED maintain a state in which the lights are turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights up white).

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When the first special symbol storage designation command based on winning (first pending number = 1) is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. At the same time as the first hold icon is displayed, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed with a return error occurring in the production button 17, the production button LED flashes red ( abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

Note that not starting the initial operation of the production button 17 corresponds to not performing the "large rise" of the initial actions shown in FIG. 45, and "continuous vibration (2 seconds )" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are not included. That is, even if the production button 17 has a return abnormality, "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" will be executed. In other words, the above-mentioned "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are predetermined regardless of the position of the production button 17 (whether it is the origin position or the high rise position). When the timing is reached, it can be said to be executed for a predetermined period of time.
For example, if "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" or "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" is executed in conjunction with the operating position of the production button 17 (large rise position, origin position returned from the large rise position), Although the production button 17 can be vibrated without any problem, the production button 17 cannot be vibrated without any problem due to the fact that the production button 17 cannot be moved to the large raised position and the origin position returned from the large raised position. There are concerns that it cannot be confirmed that it is even possible to do so.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49, even if there is a recovery error in the production button 17, only "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" among the initial operations are predetermined. By executing the process for a predetermined time when the timing is reached, the above-mentioned concerns can be resolved.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 ends at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 starts, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 ends at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the initial light emission ends in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the light is turned on while waiting for a customer (white light), and at the timing of T7, the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound starts. After the time has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

At timing T8, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production The operation of returning the button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ).

At timing T8, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the second movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production The operation of returning the button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality, and the initial The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for a customer.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " "Pon ♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the first movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production The operation of returning the button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. The second movable member 74 starts blinking in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED maintain a state in which the lights are turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights up white).

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " "Pon ♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production The operation of returning the button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed with a return error occurring in the production button 17, the production button LED flashes red ( abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.
Note that the point that the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not started is the same as that described in the explanation of FIG. 49, so the explanation here will be omitted.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 ends at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 starts, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 ends at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn on (white light) while waiting for a customer.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a specific example where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and with pending memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the second power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production The operation of returning the button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and the image display device displays a recovery screen including the words "Please resume the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number is displayed on the image display device. A state in which no pending numbers are displayed in the display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub-second hold display 84 has a display mode showing "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain a state of being turned off.

At timing T5, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at timing T7, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. When the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the extinguished state.

At timing T8, when a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the "753" production symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ in a stopped state (still display). A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) is displayed, and a stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "2".

In addition, if the state after the power is restored is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and there is no hold memory, "0" is displayed on the sub-first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and at the timing of T9. The basic flow of operations from the timing T1 to the timing T8 described above is the same, except that the variable performance is not started upon receipt of the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

Cases in which the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally are cases in which power is supplied to the production control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, or when power is not supplied to the production control board 110 from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. Cases where the command communication line is disconnected, cases where the connector of the command communication line is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), etc.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, the special symbol storage designation command (the first pending number and the second When the number of reservations = 0) is received, the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T4, when a fluctuation start command (effect pattern designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. , and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable production (production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon, or the icon concerned) , BGM output) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

Note that the specific example of the case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on is also the same as the specific example of the case where the power-on designation command described above cannot be received normally.

(Specific example of restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 56 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a specific example of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable The member LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance that was executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device In this case, a standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed in which the losing performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen and displays the sub Information display device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen may be displayed (regardless of whether or not after the variable performance has been completed, if a customer waiting state designation command is received) If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (or after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and "RAM An initialization notification sound consisting of a voice saying "It's clear" is output.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission. do.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, when the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are already being executed, the variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) are being executed, or the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) ), even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during execution, the image will be displayed until the power-on designation command is received as the power-on command at timing T4. Except for the fact that the screen displayed on the device is a variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen), This is similar to the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped.

Further, in the case where there is a return abnormality in each accessory, the initial operation of the various accessories will be performed in the same way as the specific example shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 48, or FIG. 49.

Next, a case will be described in which the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the main power supply is restarted while the backup power supply continues.

If the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed with the symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ being stopped and displayed (stationary display), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production are displayed. The button LED is lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

Thereafter, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 ( The sub first fluctuation indicator 81, the second sub fluctuation indicator 82, the first sub hold indicator 83, the second sub hold indicator 84, the sub general fluctuation indicator 85, the sub general hold indicator 86) are also displayed. Maintain content.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

Thereafter, when the production control board 130 receives a power recovery designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the origin position of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is The return operation to is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen when the power is restored. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display), and the audio output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

Then, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

Thereafter, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the lighting is turned on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Initial operation is started.

When the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn on (white light) while waiting for a customer. .

In addition, if the variable performance (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) is already being executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various characters has been completed, that is, the variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device. If the power recovery designation command is received while is displayed, the same as after timing T2 in the specific example shown in FIG. 54 occurs.

In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have already been completed, in other words, the opening effect screen is displayed on the image display device. If a power recovery designation command is received while either the round effect screen or the ending effect screen is being displayed, the process will be executed after timing T2 in the specific example shown in FIG. 54, except for the display contents of the image display device. It will be the same.

Specifically, on the image display device, a special jackpot effect screen is displayed instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the special jackpot effect screen is not displayed until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. maintain. Note that the display of a special jackpot effect screen may be maintained until the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the case where there is a return abnormality in each accessory, the initial operation of the various accessories will be performed in the same way as the specific example shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 48, or FIG. 49.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting that the power supply is to be restarted is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device after returning to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device (initial screen display only), and after recovery to no pending memory/with pending memory while special symbols are being displayed. The display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device (the display of the initial screen + the screen during recovery) is made to be different. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when the stopped power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of held memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is a held memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the image display device is performing a specific display suggesting the restart of power supply, the hold icon display area does not execute the hold display, but the sub hold display can execute the hold display. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. It becomes possible to suppress this.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). By doing this, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, and the display control when restoring the control state of the game after the power supply was resumed. It becomes possible to reduce such processing load.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, the special symbol is displayed on the sub-variation display (sub-first variation display 81, sub-second variation display 82) after the control state of the game is restored. Even if the variable display is being executed (the returning screen is displayed), the variable display (blinking display) is not performed while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. By doing so, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, for the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. (before the variable display is performed on the sub variable display and at the time of receiving the special symbol storage designation command), the display mode is designed to show the pending number. By doing this, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display (blinking display) on the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-hold indicators (the first sub-hold indicator 83 and the second sub-hold indicator 84) may be set in a display mode that shows the number of holds. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of the various accessories is performed at the same timing as when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends). By doing this, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, during the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), the light emission of various accessories (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, production button LED) are turned off. By doing this, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, if any of the various accessories has a return abnormality, the light emitting part of the accessory that has the return error will flash red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. By doing this, it becomes possible to know which accessory has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has returned abnormally, until the next variable performance is started. Abnormality notifications continue. By doing this, it becomes possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. The initial motion of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is started from the timing after the return operation is completed (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed). However, if the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (the display of the recovery screen (Middle), the initial movements of various accessories are performed. By doing this, it becomes possible to perform the initial operation of various accessories at appropriate timings depending on the state when power supply occurs.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (special The initial operation is performed after the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) changes to the display mode indicating the number of holdings (during the fluctuating display of symbols and before displaying the production pattern 70a). It looks like this. By doing this, it is possible to perform the initial movements of the board objects after the player has grasped the number of reservations (future progress of the game), and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Become.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the frame accessory (production button 17) is displayed on the image display device during recovery (while the special symbol is being varied and the production symbol The initial operation is performed after the sub-holding display (first sub-holding display 83, second sub-holding display 84) changes to a display mode indicating the number of holdings (before the display of 70a). By doing this, the initial movement of the frame accessory can be performed after the player understands the number of reservations (future progress of the game), and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Become.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (in case the return operation is completed immediately, the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of the various accessories It is designed to take action. By doing this, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even if the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Become.

In addition, when displaying the stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored by simply displaying the initial screen. The operation, initial operation, and initial light emission are not executed. By doing this, it becomes possible to understand that an abnormality has occurred in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main When receiving a special symbol storage designation command based on winning of a game ball to the starting hole from the control board 110, a winning sound is output. By doing this, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has entered the starting hole.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main When a variation start command is received from the control board 110, a variation effect is executed without displaying a standby screen. By doing this, the start of the variable presentation is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to execute the variable presentation from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main When a fluctuation start command is received from the control board 110, a fluctuation effect is executed without performing the return operation or initial operation of various accessories. By doing this, it becomes possible to perform performances using various accessories without being hindered by the return action or initial action during execution of the variable performance.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even if the main control board If the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the restoration operation of various accessories and the initial operation are performed again. (including initial light emission). By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

In addition, during the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission), during variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or during jackpot games (opening effect, round effect, ending effect). However, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command or power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the various accessories are restarted. The return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even if the customer is in a waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped. When restarting, for example, and receiving a power-on designation command from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

In addition, even if the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished (loss fluctuation performance, jackpot fluctuation performance) or jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance), the main control board 110 If the power supply is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Note that when a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of performing the return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) of various accessories. You can just output .

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, power supply to the main control board 110 is continued even after the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various accessories have already been completed. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 after the main control board 110 stops, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the power is turned on again from the main control board 110. When a recovery designation command is received, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

In addition, even if the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished (loss fluctuation performance, jackpot fluctuation performance) or jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance), the main control board 110 If the power supply is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 110 When the power recovery designation command is received again from the controller, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

(Modified example where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 57 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable The component LED and the production button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance that was executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device In this case, a standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed in which the losing performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen and displays the sub Information display device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen may be displayed (regardless of whether or not after the variable performance has been completed, if a customer waiting state designation command is received) If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (or after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Loading", and displays the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED. , and the performance button LED goes out.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, is displayed on the image display device. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the audio output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Sound is output.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission. do.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, when the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are already being executed, the variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) are being executed, or the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) ), even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the image display device is Except for the fact that the displayed screen is a variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen), the main control is performed while waiting for a customer. This is similar to the case where only the power supply to the board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

Next, a case will be described in which the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the main power supply is restarted while the backup power supply continues.

If the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed with the symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ being stopped and displayed (stationary display), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production are displayed. The button LED is lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

Thereafter, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 ( The sub first fluctuation indicator 81, the second sub fluctuation indicator 82, the first sub hold indicator 83, the second sub hold indicator 84, the sub general fluctuation indicator 85, the sub general hold indicator 86) are also displayed. Maintain content.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

Thereafter, when the production control board 130 receives a power recovery designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the origin position of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is The return operation to is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed on the image display device. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

Then, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

Thereafter, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission in the production button LED is completed and the lighting is turned on while waiting for a customer (white lighting), and at timing T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

When the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn on (white light) while waiting for a customer. .

In addition, if the variable performance (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) is already being executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various characters has been completed, that is, the variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device. Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) stops while " is displayed, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted, the image display device will display the An initial screen containing the characters "Medium" is displayed, and then, when the production control board 130 receives a power recovery designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, various accessories return operations, and Initial operations are performed. At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen containing the words "Please resume playing" instead of the initial screen, and does not display the returning screen until the next special symbol confirmation command is received. maintain.

In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have already been completed, in other words, the opening effect screen is displayed on the image display device. When either the round effect screen or the ending effect screen was displayed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) was stopped, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 was restarted. In this case, the image display device displays an initial screen containing the words "Loading", and then the production control board 130 receives a power recovery designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110. Upon reception, the return operations and initial operations of various accessories are executed. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect screen instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and maintains the display of the special jackpot effect screen until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. . Note that the display of a special jackpot effect screen may be maintained until the jackpot game ends.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the standby screen on which the effect pattern 70a is displayed changes to an initial screen different from the standby screen. It is designed to be switched. By doing this, it becomes possible to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the It is designed to turn off the production button LED. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, the initial movements of various accessories do not start from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, but from the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation may be started.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen when the power-on designation command is received. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started at the timing when the standby screen switches to the initial screen, or at the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial movements of various accessories may be started at the switched timing.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed (receiving a power-on designation command), the initial screen is displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. You can also do this. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started from the timing when the hidden state is switched to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial motion of various accessories may be started at the timing when the switch is made.

(Modified example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a modification in a case where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality. (abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the lighting is turned on while waiting for a customer (white lighting), and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is completed. The initial operation process ends without any operation being performed.

At the timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T7, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When the first special symbol storage designation command based on winning (first pending number = 1) is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. At the same time as the first hold icon is displayed, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED light up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that even if there is a return error in the first movable member 73 when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return error. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are configured to complete the initial motion processing without performing the initial motion.

Furthermore, even when the power is restored, if there is a return error in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will notify the occurrence of the return error. In order to do so, it flashes in red (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, when there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the return abnormality is detected not only in the movable member with the return abnormality. Initial operations are also not performed for movable members that are not present. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable members (especially the movable member in which the return abnormality has not occurred) from ceasing to operate during the execution of the game (variable performance, jackpot game), thereby reducing the interest in the game. This makes it possible to prevent

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, when there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red to notify you of a recovery error. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand that there is an abnormality in the movable member, compared to a case where only the movable member LED provided on one of the movable members having the return abnormality blinks red.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second The initial operation is performed for the effect buttons 17 that have no risk of colliding with the member 74. By doing this, it is possible to check the operation of the performance button 17, and it becomes possible to understand an abnormality in the performance button 17.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, even if there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the production button LED provided in the production button 17 is restored. It is designed to emit an initial light without flashing red to notify of an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that there is no return abnormality in the production button 17.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the production button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

In addition, in FIGS. 46 to 58, the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is described as a type that depends on the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110. However, the initial operation of the movable performance device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) described in FIGS. 42 and 43 is of a type that does not depend on the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110. 46 to 58 may be performed.

Next, using FIGS. 59 to 71, the modes of initial operation and presentation operation of the various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) described in FIGS. 44 to 58 will be explained. etc. will be explained.

(Specific example of initial operation mode and required time of first movable member)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a specific example of the mode and required time of the initial operation of the first movable member 73.
First, "A" indicates the origin position of the first movable member 73, "B" indicates the first initial operating position of the first movable member 73, and "C" indicates the origin position of the first movable member 73. 73 is shown in its second initial operating position. The first initial operating position of "B" is the same as the first presentation position in FIG. 78, which will be described later, and the second initial operating position of "C" is the same as the second presentation position in FIG. 78, which will be described later. It's the location. In addition, below, it is simply described as "A,""B," and "C."

(a) shows a mode of "first movable member small descent" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "first movable member small descent", the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "B" over "0.3 S (seconds)". In this movement, the robot moves from "A" to "B" all at once without stopping or the like in the middle.
Note that in (a) to (f), the first movable member LED of the first movable member 73 is lit (lights up) alternately in blue and white (see FIG. 44).

(b) shows a state in which the first movable member 73 is stopped at "B" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 44). That is, when the first movable member 73 moves to "B", it stops (stays) at "B" for "1S".

(c) shows a mode of "first movable member return to origin" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "first movable member return to origin", the first movable member 73 moves from "B" to "A" over "0.6S". In this movement, it is assumed that the object moves from "B" to "A" all at once without stopping or the like in the middle.

In this way, when the first movable member 73 performs a small descent related to the initial operation and returns to the original position, it takes longer to move from "B" to "A" than from "A" to "B". The relationship is that the time is longer.
In particular, since the first movable member 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A", "B", which moves against the vertical direction, is especially By setting the time required to move from "A" to "A" longer than the time required to move from "A" to "B", the initial operation is performed without imposing a load on the drive source of the first movable member 73. can do.
Also, when compared including the time spent stopping at "B", the time spent stopping at "B" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "B" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from to "B".
As a result, for example, the time during which the first movable member 73 is stopped at "B" is used to make the worker (worker, game store clerk) check whether there is any problem with the first movable member 73. be able to.

(d) shows a mode of "first movable member large descent" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "first movable member large descent", the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "C" over "0.8S".

(e) shows a state in which the first movable member 73 is stopped at "C" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 44). That is, when the first movable member 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for "2S".

(f) shows a mode of "first movable member return to origin" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "first movable member return to origin", the first movable member 73 moves from "C" to "A" over "1.6S".

In this way, when the first movable member 73 performs a large descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, it takes longer to move from "C" to "A" than from "A" to "C". The relationship is that the time is longer.
In particular, since the first movable member 73 is an accessory that has a predetermined amount of weight and moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A", "C", which moves against the vertical direction, is particularly By taking a longer time to move from "A" to "C" than from "A" to "C," the initial operation is performed without imposing a load on the drive source of the first movable member 73. can do.
Also, when compared including the time spent stopping at "C", the time spent stopping at "C" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "C" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from to "C".
As a result, for example, the time during which the first movable member 73 is stopped at "C" is used to have a worker (worker, game store clerk) check whether there is any problem with the first movable member 73. be able to.

(Specific example of performance operation mode and required time of first movable member)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a specific example of the mode and required time of the performance operation of the first movable member 73.
First, "A" indicates the origin position of the first movable member 73, "B" indicates the first effect position of the first movable member 73, and "C" indicates the origin position of the first movable member 73. The second presentation position is shown. The first effect position of "B" is the same as the first initial operation position in FIG. 77 described above, and the second effect position of "C" is the same as the second initial operation position in FIG. 77 described above. It's the location. In addition, below, it is simply described as "A,""B," and "C." Further, it is assumed that the operation in the movement process is the same as the initial operation mode shown in FIG.

(a) shows the performance mode of the above-mentioned "swinging notice". In other words, this indicates that the "first movable member is slightly lowered" while the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are being displayed in a variable manner.
In this "oscillation notice", the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "B" over "0.5S (seconds)".
Note that in (a) to (c), the first movable member LED of the first movable member 73 lights up (lights up) alternately in red and white (see FIG. 69, which will be described later).

(b) shows that the first movable member 73 moves up and down to "B" and then swings in the vertical direction (the "swing" is omitted in FIG. 69). That is, when the first movable member 73 moves to "B", it swings (stays) at "B" for "3S".
Such performance operation mode is designed to improve expectations for the awarding of a jackpot game.

(c) shows a mode of "first movable member return to origin" (see FIG. 69 described later) in "oscillation notice". That is, when the swing for "3S" is completed at "B", the first movable member 73 moves from "B" to "A" over "0.8S".

In this way, when the first movable member 73 performs a small descent related to the performance operation and returns to the original position, it moves from "B" to "A" longer than it takes to move from "A" to "B". The relationship is that the time is longer.
In particular, since the first movable member 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A", "B", which moves against the vertical direction, is especially By setting the time required to move from "A" to "A" longer than the time required to move from "A" to "B", the performance operation is executed without imposing a load on the drive source of the first movable member 73. can do.
Also, when compared including the time spent stopping at "B", the time spent stopping at "B" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "B" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from to "B".
Thereby, it is possible to draw attention to the swinging motion performed in "B", and it is possible to improve the player's expectation of being awarded a jackpot game.
Moreover, when compared with the initial motion in FIG. The performance movement takes longer.
The reason for such a time relationship is that the situation in each operation scene is considered.
For example, when an initial movement is performed, it is only necessary for the worker (worker, game store clerk) to pay attention to the initial movement, so even if the operation takes a shorter time than the performance movement, the worker (worker, game store clerk) ) is unlikely to miss the initial behavior.
On the other hand, when a presentation operation is performed, for example, in addition to the rocking notification, various jackpot notification presentations may be performed in combination at the same time, and the range that the player pays attention to on the game board 5 is wide. Therefore, if the operation is performed for the same time as the initial operation or for a shorter time than the initial operation, there is a concern that it will be delayed in noticing that the jackpot preview effect using the first movable member 73 is being executed.
Therefore, in the initial motion, the first movable member 73 is operated for a shorter time than the production motion, thereby shortening the time related to the initial motion, and in the production motion, the first movable member 73 is operated for a longer time than the initial motion. This eliminates the concern that there would be a delay in noticing that a jackpot preview performance using

(d) shows the performance mode of jackpot notification in the above-mentioned "decision performance". That is, the special symbol TZ is temporarily stopped and displayed at "777", indicating that "the first movable member greatly descends" has been performed.
In the jackpot notification in this "decisive effect", the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "C" over "1S (second)".
Furthermore, the effect image EF, which was not displayed during the initial operation (see FIG. 59), is displayed at a position (first image display device 70) corresponding to the periphery of the first movable member 73 that has moved to "C". It is emphasized that it was a big hit.
Further, at the start of the movement of the first movable member 73 from "A" to "C", the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in a rainbow color. That is, the lamp CPU 150a drives the first movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75, to move the first movable member 73 from "A" to "C", and also moves the first movable member 73 from "A" to "C". The first movable member LED (full color), which is a part, lights up (lights up) in a rainbow (see FIG. 69, which will be described later). The lighting (light-emitting) mode of the rainbow is a lighting (light-emitting) mode that definitively notifies that a jackpot has been won.

(e) shows a state in which the first movable member 73 is stopped at "C" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 69). That is, when the first movable member 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for "5S".
Note that even when the "stop" is performed, the first movable member LED of the first movable member 73 lights up (lights up) in a rainbow color, and the position corresponding to the periphery of the first movable member 73 (first An effect image EF is displayed on the image display device 70).

(f) shows a mode of "first movable member return to origin" (see FIG. 69 described later) in jackpot notification of "decision performance". That is, after stopping for "5S" at "C", the first movable member 73 moves from "C" to "A" over "2S".

In this way, when the first movable member 73 performs a large descent related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, it moves from "C" to "A" longer than it takes to move from "A" to "C". The relationship is that the time is longer.
In particular, since the first movable member 73 is an accessory that has a predetermined amount of weight and moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A", "C", which moves against the vertical direction, is particularly By taking a longer time to move from "A" to "C" than from "A" to "C", the performance operation is executed without putting a load on the drive source of the first movable member 73. can do.
Also, when compared including the time spent stopping at "C", the time spent stopping at "C" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "C" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from to "C".
As a result, for example, when the first movable member 73 is stopped at "C", it is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction at having won the jackpot, and when the first movable member 73 is stopped at "C", it moves from "C" to "A". By taking more time to move from "A" to "C" than when moving from "A" to "C", the player can be immersed in the afterglow of hitting the jackpot, giving him a greater sense of satisfaction. can.
Furthermore, when compared with the initial motion in FIG. The performance movement takes longer.
The reasons for this time relationship are generally the same as those stated in sections (a) to (c) above, but since (d) to (f) are jackpot announcements, especially By making the stay time at "C" longer and the time taken to move from "C" to "A" longer than the initial movement, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction for hitting the jackpot, and the player It also allows you to soak in the afterglow of hitting the jackpot.
In FIGS. 60(d) to 60(f), the explanation is given using the jackpot notification scene of the "determined performance" as an example, but the scene is not limited to this and may be applied to other scenes. For example, the present invention may be applied to a scene where a high-probability gaming state is to be awarded, or a time-saving gaming state is to be given.

Note that the required times shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate.
Further, the time relationships described in FIGS. 59 and 60 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "A" to "B" and the travel time from "B" to "A" may be the same, or the travel time from "A" to "A" is longer than the travel time from "B" to "A". The travel time of "B" may be longer.
Further, although the stop (residence) time was the longest at "B" and "C", it may be the shortest, or the stop (residence) time does not have to be at "B" or "C".

(Specific example of initial operation mode and required time of second movable member)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a specific example of the initial operation mode and required time of the second movable member 74.
First, "D" indicates the origin position of the second movable member 74, and "E" indicates the initial operating position (for convenience, referred to as the third initial operating position in this embodiment) of the second movable member 74. ing. Note that the third initial operation position of "E" is the same position as the third performance position in FIG. 63, which will be described later. In addition, below, it is simply described as "D" and "E."

(a) shows a mode of "second movable member rising" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "second movable member rise", the second movable member 74 moves from "D" to "E" over "0.6S (seconds)". In this movement, the robot moves from "D" to "E" all at once without stopping or the like in the middle.
Note that in (a) to (c), the second movable member LED of the second movable member 74 alternately lights up (lights up) in blue and white (see FIG. 44).

(b) shows a mode in which the second movable member 74 moves to "E", the rotating body 74a rotates, and then stops. That is, when the second movable member 74 moves to "E", it stops (stays) at "E" for "5S".

(c) shows a mode of "second movable member return to origin" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "second movable member return to origin", the second movable member 74 moves from "E" to "D" over "0.3S". In this movement, the robot moves from "E" to "D" all at once without stopping in the middle.

In this way, when the second movable member 74 ascends according to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time taken to move from "D" to "E" is longer than the time taken to move from "E" to "D". The relationship is such that it is longer.
In particular, the second movable member 74 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that moves upward from "D" (direction opposing the vertical direction). By setting the time required to move from "D" to "E" to be longer than the time required to move from "E" to "D", no load is placed on the drive source of the second movable member 74. Initial operations can be performed.
Also, when compared including the time spent at "D", the time spent stopping at "D" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "D" to "E", and then from "E" to " The relationship is such that the time taken to move to "D".
As a result, for example, the time during which the second movable member 74 is stopped at "E" is used to allow the worker (worker, game store clerk) to check whether there is any problem with the second movable member 74. be able to.

(Specific example of performance operation mode and required time of second movable member)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a specific example of the mode and required time of the performance operation of the second movable member 74.
First, "D" indicates the origin position of the second movable member 74, and "E" indicates the production position (for convenience, referred to as the third production position in this embodiment) of the second movable member 74. . Note that the third performance position of "E" is the same position as the third initial operation position in FIG. 61 described above. In addition, below, it is simply described as "D" and "E." Further, it is assumed that the operation in the movement process is the same as the initial operation mode in FIG. 61 . Furthermore, in (a) to (f), it is assumed that a variable effect of variable effect pattern 17 (see FIG. 27) is being performed.

(a) shows a state in which a normal reach performance in the variable performance pattern 17 is performed, and a loss is reported as a result of the normal reach performance. That is, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed at "565", respectively. Further, at this time, the second movable member 74 is located at "D".

(b) shows a state in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 1S) has passed since (a), and the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are still temporarily stopped and displayed at "565". In addition, the second movable member 74 is swinging at the "D" position, and at the same time, the sound effect "rattle" is output from the audio output device 9, and the second movable member 74 moves to "E" to reach the normal reach. This is fueling players' expectations that the performance will evolve into SPSP reach performance (SPSP reach performance development stimulation).
In addition, in the variable performance pattern 17, the second movable member 74 moves to "E" as shown in (c) because it is a variable performance pattern in which a loss is once notified in the normal reach performance and then develops into the SPSP reach performance. However, for example, in variable performance pattern 5, since the variable performance pattern ends with the normal reach performance (loss), the second movable member 74 is not movable as a result, although the development of the SPSP reach performance is encouraged. Instead, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss, and the variable performance ends.

(c) shows a development effect in which the second movable member 74 moves to "E" (second movable member rises) as a result of inciting the development of SPSP reach effect. Specifically, the second movable member 74 moves from "D" to "E" over "0.8S". Further, an effect image EF is displayed at a position (first image display device 70) corresponding to the periphery of the second movable member 74, and the special symbol TZ has started to be displayed in a variable manner.

(d) shows that the development performance continues to be performed. Specifically, after the second movable member 74 moves to "E", the second movable part (rotating body 74a) of the second movable member 74 starts rotating, and after rotating for a predetermined period of time (for example, 6S). Stop rotation. That is, when the second movable member 74 moves to "E", it stops (stays) at "E" for "7S".

(e) shows a mode of "second movable member return to origin" (see FIG. 69 described later) after the development effect is finished. That is, when the stay for "7S" is completed at "E", the second movable member 74 moves from "E" to "D" over "0.5S".

In (f), the second movable member 74 has completed the movement to "D", and the title image of the SPSP reach effect is displayed on the first image display device 70.
Note that, although explanations using figures are omitted, the above-described rising notice performance also has a performance operation mode similar to that shown in FIG. 62.

In this way, when the second movable member 74 performs a development performance or a rising preview performance and returns to the origin position, it moves from "D" to "E" longer than the time it takes to move from "E" to "D". The relationship is that the time is longer.
In particular, the second movable member 74 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that moves upward from "D" (direction opposing the vertical direction). By setting the time required to move from "D" to "E" to be longer than the time required to move from "E" to "D", no load is placed on the drive source of the second movable member 74. It is possible to perform performance actions.
Also, when comparing the time spent at "E", the time spent at "E" is the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "D" to "E", and then "E". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from to "D".
Thereby, it is possible to draw attention to the rotational movement of the second movable part (rotating body 74a) performed in "E", and it is possible to improve the player's expectation that a jackpot game will be awarded.

In addition, as shown in the comparison between the initial operation mode and the production operation mode in Fig. 63, the moving time from "D" to "E" is "0.6S" in the initial operation mode, while in the production operation mode is "0.8S", and the initial operation mode is "5S", but the production operation mode is "7S", and the stay time at "E" is "7S" from "E" to "D". The moving time to `` is ``0.3S'' for the initial operation mode, while it is ``0.5S'' for the production operation mode, and in both cases, the time for the production operation is longer than the initial operation. In a relationship.
The reason for such a time relationship is generally the same as that described in parts (a) to (c) of Fig. 60, but in particular, the stay time at "E" is longer than the initial operation. This also has the advantage of increasing the player's expectation of being awarded a jackpot game.

Note that the required time shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is only an example, and may be changed as appropriate.
Further, the time relationships described in FIGS. 61 and 62 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "D" to "E" and the travel time from "E" to "D" may be the same, or the travel time from "E" to "E" is longer than the travel time from "D" to "E". The travel time of "D" may be longer.
Also, although the stay time at "D" is the longest, it may be the shortest, or it is not necessary to stay at "D".

(About production button 17)
Although the production button 17 is not particularly shown, it can be moved from the origin position to a position corresponding to "big rise" shown in FIG. 45.
Note that the "big rise" corresponds to the "button hit" shown in FIG. 27. That is, in the production operation, for example, in the "decision production", the robot moves to a position corresponding to "big rise".
Here, in the initial operation of the effect button 17 (see FIG. 45), the moving time from the origin position to the position corresponding to "large rise" is, for example, "0.5S". On the other hand, the travel time from the position corresponding to the "large rise" to the origin position is, for example, "3S". That is, in the initial operation of the production button 17, the time taken to move from the origin position to the action position (position corresponding to "big rise") is longer than the time taken to move from the action position (position corresponding to "big rise") to the origin position. is shorter.
In addition, in the performance operation of the performance button 17, the moving time from the origin position to the position corresponding to "large rise" is, for example, "0.5S". On the other hand, the travel time from the position corresponding to the "large rise" to the origin position (when the effect button 17 is not operated) is, for example, "3S". In other words, in the production action of the production button 17, the time taken to move from the origin position to the action position (position corresponding to "big rise") is longer than the time taken to move from the action position (position corresponding to "big rise") to the origin position. is shorter.
With such a relationship, for example, the performance button 17 can be quickly moved to the operating position (operation position) in a "determined performance", and the variable performance being executed on the first image display device 70 (for example, , ``Press!'' display) until the performance button 17 becomes operable can be prevented from being prolonged. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a smooth performance without stagnation.
Further, by taking time to return to the origin position from the position corresponding to the "large rise", it is possible to prevent the player from getting his or her finger caught in the end of the production button 17, for example.

Note that the initial operation of the effect button 17 and the time required for each effect operation are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time required to return to the origin position may be shorter, or the travel time to the operating position (the position corresponding to "large rise") and the travel time required to return to the origin position may be the same. It may be.
Further, the required time may be different between the initial action and the presentation action.

(Comparison between production button 17 and second movable member 74)
Here, it was explained that when a recovery error occurs in the production button 17, the initial operation will not be executed, but "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" will be executed. (See Figure 49). That is, even if a return abnormality occurs, the initial operation of the additional element (vibration) of the effect button 17 can be performed.
On the other hand, as described in FIG. 47, the second movable member 74 does not perform the initial operation of the second movable member 74 itself when a return abnormality occurs. The initial operation of the element (rotating body 74a) is also impossible.
With this configuration, the vibration mode of the production button 17 can be checked even if a return abnormality occurs, and the second movable member 74 can prevent the rotating body 74a from breaking down.

(Specific example of performance operation mode of the first movable member at the time of jackpot notification)
Next, using FIG. 64, further details of the performance mode of jackpot notification in the "decision performance" described in FIG. 60 will be explained.

In the "decision performance", a performance button operation valid period is set from timing T1 to timing T2, and during this period, a button image that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 is displayed on the first image display device 70.
In addition, if the judgment result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot, the production button 17 was pressed within the production button operation valid period, or the production button 17 was not pressed within the production button operation validity period and the timing of T2 was reached. If either of the following conditions is satisfied, the first movable member 73 will move from "A" to "C". On the other hand, if the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process is a loss, the production button 17 was pressed within the production button operation valid period, or the production button 17 was not pressed within the production button operation validity period and the timing of T2 was reached. Even if either of the above conditions is satisfied, the first movable member 73 will not move from "A" to "C" and will remain at "A".

FIG. 64(a) is a diagram illustrating a case in which the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot and the player does not press the production button 17 within the production button operation validity period.
Until the timing T1 is reached, there is an SPSP reach variation period, and the SPSP reach image is displayed on the first image display device 70. At this time, the first movable member 73 is located at "A".

Then, when the timing T1 is reached, it becomes a fixed performance period, that is, a performance button operation valid period, and a button image imitating the performance button 17 and an image saying "Press!" are displayed on the first image display device 70. Ru.
Then, when the timing T2 arrives without the player pressing the production button 17, the jackpot notification period begins, and the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "C" over "1S". Furthermore, an effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70 at a position corresponding to the periphery of the first movable member 73 (see FIG. 60).

The first movable member 73 stays at "C" for "5S", and then moves from "C" to "A" for "2S" at timing T2-1.
Then, from the timing of T2-1, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ will be temporarily stopped (for example, 777 temporary stop display) during the jackpot notification period, and when the timing of T3 is reached, the final stop period will begin, and the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol will be temporarily stopped. The symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (for example, 777 is displayed in a stopped state).

On the other hand, FIG. 64(b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot and the player presses the production button 17 at timing T1-1 of the production button operation validity period. .
In this case, the jackpot notification period begins at timing T1-1, and the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "C" over "1S". Further, on the first image display device 70, an effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the periphery of the first movable member 73 (see FIG. 60).

The first movable member 73 stays at "C" for "5S", and then moves from "C" to "A" for "2S" at timing T2-1.
Then, from the timing of T2-1, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ will be temporarily stopped (for example, 777 temporary stop display) during the jackpot notification period, and when the timing of T3 is reached, the final stop period will begin, and the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol will be temporarily stopped. The symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (for example, 777 is displayed in a stopped state).

That is, even if the player does not operate the performance button 17 during the performance button operation validity period, even if the player operates the performance button 17, the timing at which the first movable member 73 starts to move changes; The presentation operation mode (operation, required time, etc.) of the 1 movable member 73 remains unchanged. That is, even if the first movable member 73 starts the performance operation at the latest timing (T2) without operating the performance button 17, the performance operation mode (action, required time, etc.) described in FIG. 60 will be obtained.
As a result, there is no need to change the presentation operation mode of the first movable member 73 between when the presentation button 17 is not operated and when the presentation button 17 is operated, and the control load on the lamp/drive control section 150 is eliminated. It is possible to reduce the
Furthermore, even if the first movable member 73 starts the performance operation at the latest timing (T2) without operating the performance button 17, part of the performance operation mode (motion, required time, etc.) of the first movable member 73 will be affected. In addition, since all of the games are not omitted, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the jackpot from feeling unsatisfied.

(Variation example of the time required for the initial operation mode and the time required for the production operation mode)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a modified example of the time required for the initial operation mode and the time required for the production operation mode.
Here, in FIG. 65, for convenience, a modification will be explained using the first movable member 73, but a similar modification may be applied to the second movable member 74.

The initial operation mode (first f) shown in FIG. 65 is shown in FIG. 59(f), so the explanation here will be omitted.
On the other hand, in the performance operation mode, unlike in FIG. 60(f), in the first movable member return to origin in (performance f1), it moves from "C" to "C'" over "1S", and further, In (act f2) the first movable member returns to the origin, the first movable member 73 stops at "C'", and furthermore, in (act f3) the first movable member returns to the origin, the first movable member 73 performs the production operation ( tilting motion). Note that the time required from stopping at "C'" to completing the presentation operation (tilting operation) is "1.5S". Furthermore, in the first movable member return to origin (act f4), the first movable member return to origin is completed by moving from "C'" to "A" over "1S".
With this configuration, it is possible to provide more visual interest than simply returning the movable member to its origin, and it is possible to further improve the game's interest.

In Figure 65, the time taken to move from the initial action mode "C" to "A" is "1.6S", while the total time taken to move from the production action mode "C" to "A" is "1.6S". It becomes "3.5S".
In this way, by making the movements in the movement process different between the initial movement mode and the performance movement mode, the movement times may be different as a result.
That is, in the examples of FIGS. 59 to 63, the movement process is the same in the initial movement mode and the production movement mode, but the movement time is different, whereas in the example of FIG. The movement time differs between the initial movement mode and the effect movement mode because the movements in the movement process are different.
That is, the difference in the moving time of each movable member in this embodiment includes both the examples shown in FIGS. 59 to 63 and the example shown in FIG. 65.

(Variation example 1 of initial operation mode and production operation mode)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a first modification of the initial operation mode and the performance operation mode.
Here, in FIG. 66, for convenience, the modification will be explained using the first movable member 73, but this modification may be applied to the second movable member 74.

Since (first a) and (first c) shown in FIG. 66 indicate FIGS. 59(a) and (c), the explanation here will be omitted.
Furthermore, since (Exhibit 1a) and (Exhibit 1c) show FIGS. 60(a) and (c), their explanations here will be omitted.
On the other hand, (Run 2a) shows the operation mode when executing the above-mentioned pseudo-coupling. During this pseudo continuous stirring, the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "B" over "0.3S", and when returning to the origin, the first movable member 73 moves from "B" to " Move by multiplying "A" by "0.6S".
In other words, the travel times for (first a) and (act 2a) are both "0.3S", and the travel times for (first c) and (act 2c) are both "0.6S", which is the same travel time. Comparing (first a) and (performance 1a), (first a) is "0.3S", (first performance 1a) is "0.5S", and (first c) is "0.3S". 6S'', whereas (act 1b) is ``0.8S'', the travel time will be different.
In other words, even if the movement is to the same position, depending on the type of performance, the movement time may be the same as the initial movement mode, or the movement time may not be the same as the initial movement mode.
Thereby, when performing a performance motion, even if the movement is to the same position, the movement takes a plurality of moving times, so it is possible to perform a performance motion that is less likely to cause boredom.
Also, the travel time for (first a) and (act 2a) are both "0.3S", and the travel time for (first c) and (act 2c) are both "0.6S", which is the same travel time. Common performance data (performance data related to driving) can be used for the initial operation mode and the performance operation mode. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the production data (performance data related to driving).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, the initial operation mode and the production operation mode may be the same or different, or the initial operation mode and the production operation mode may be the same. It may be possible to include only one or only one whose initial operation mode and presentation operation mode are different.

(Variation example 2 of initial operation mode and production operation mode)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a second modification of the initial operation mode and the production operation mode.
Note that FIG. 67 shows a modification of a movable member, such as the second movable member 74, that includes a second movable portion (rotating body 74a).

Since (first a), (first b), and (first c) shown in FIG. 67 indicate FIGS. 61(a), (b), and (c), the explanation here will be omitted.
On the other hand, (performance c'), (performance d'), and (performance e') differ from FIGS. 62(c), (d), and (e) in the following points. That is, in FIG. 62(e), the second movable part (rotating body 74a) of the second movable member 74 is rotated for "6S" at "E", and after stopping the rotation at "E" (residence time is moved to "7S") and "D".
On the other hand, in FIG. 67 (action e'), the movement to "D" is started when "5S" has elapsed from the start of rotation of the second movable part (rotating body 74a). In this case, the stay time at "E" is also shorter than in FIG. 62.
When the performance operation mode is configured in this way, unlike the initial operation mode, the second movable part (rotating body 74a) continues to rotate from beginning to end, making it difficult for the player to feel that the performance is interrupted. , it is possible to further improve the interest of the performance.

Note that a movable member, such as the second movable member 74, which includes a second movable part (rotating body 74a) and whose operation is more complicated than the first movable member 73, for example, The operation of the section may be omitted (the operation mode may be different between the initial operation and the performance operation). For example, in the initial operation, the second movable part (rotating body 74a) may not be rotated, or the rotation time may be shortened. As a result, the time required for initial operations can be shortened while maintaining the interest of the performance. On the other hand, the first movable member 73, whose motion is less complicated than that of the second movable member 74, may perform the same motion in the initial motion and the performance motion. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform accurate operations in accordance with the operation mode of each movable member.
On the other hand, for a movable member whose motion is complicated, the initial motion may be performed without omitting it, and for a movable member whose motion is not complicated, part or all of the initial motion may be omitted.

(Comparison of the first movable member and the second movable member in a performance scene)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a comparison between the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 in a performance scene.

As described above, the first movable member 73 is a movable member that can be operated in the scene of a preview or the scene of a jackpot notification, such as a rocking preview or a jackpot notification of a fixed performance. On the other hand, the second movable member 74 is a movable member that can be operated in the event of advance notice, such as a development effect or an upward advance notice effect, but cannot be operated in the event of jackpot notification.

Here, the relationship between the scene in which each movable member is operated and the movement time of each movable member will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 68 (performance 1a) and (performance 1b), in the jackpot notification scene in which the first movable member 73 is actuated, as described above, the moving time from "A" to "C" is "1S". , and the moving time from "C" to "A" is "2S". In other words, the time required to return to the origin is longer.
As mentioned above, the reason for doing this is to make the player feel the afterglow of winning the jackpot, but there is also another reason that after the jackpot is announced, the As shown, the first image display device 70 does not perform a jackpot preview performance, and the special symbol TZ is also visible. At 70, information important to the player is not displayed.
Therefore, even if the first movable member 73 is returned to its original position over time, the first movable member 73 does not interfere with the display contents of the first image display device 70. It will be done.
Also from this aspect, the time required for the first movable member 73 to return to the origin is longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68 (Performance 2a) to (Performance 2d), in the scene where the second movable member 74 is activated, the moving time from "D" to "E" is "0.8S", and the moving time from "E" to "D" is "0.5S". In other words, the time required to move to the performance position is longer.
The reason for doing this is to prevent the load from being applied to the drive source of the second movable member 74, as described above, but there are other reasons, such as when the second movable member 74 performs an upward warning effect. At the timing of performing this, other jackpot preview performances may also be executed at the same time, and this prevents the other jackpot preview performances being executed from becoming difficult to see due to the rising preview performance of the second movable member 74. , etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (performance 2a), a line preview image SY is displayed in the operating range of the second movable member 74 of the first image display device 70. In addition, in dialogue previews, multiple dialogues may be connected to form a single sentence (for example, the dialogue ``This change is...'' and the dialogue ``It's hot!'' may be connected to form a sentence). Image SY may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10S). More specifically, the line ``This change is...'' is displayed for 5S, then the line ``This change is...'' is erased, and the line ``It's hot!'' is displayed for 5S. It looks like this.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (performance 2b), while the line preview image SY is being displayed, the second movable member 74 performs a rising preview effect, and the line preview image SY is moved to "E". The second movable member 74 and the effect image EF displayed at a position corresponding to the periphery of the second movable member 74 make it difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (performance 2c), when the rising preview effect by the second movable member 74 is finished, the effect image EF is erased, and the second movable member 74 returns to its origin, so that the first image The line preview image SY displayed on the display device 70 becomes visible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (act 2d), the second stage of the dialogue preview image SY, "Hot!", becomes visible.
That is, if the second movable member 74 is returned to the original position over time at the preview stage, the player will not be able to hear "Hot!" in the second stage of the dialogue preview image SY shown in FIG. 68 (performance 2d). There is a concern that it may not be visible.
Therefore, in order to eliminate such concerns, the second movable member 74 is quickly returned to its origin.
From this aspect as well, the time required for the second movable member 74 to move to the presentation position is longer.

(Comparison of the initial movement and production movement of each movable member of the board role)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a comparison between the initial motion and performance motion of each movable member of the board accessory.
Specifically, a comparison is shown between the initial motion pattern 1 of FIG. 44 and the performance motion of the first movable member 73, and a comparison between the initial motion pattern 1 of FIG. 44 and the performance motion of the second movable member 74. Note that a part of the description of the initial operation pattern 1 is omitted for convenience.

As mentioned above, the performance operations using the first movable member 73 include "pseudo-continuous promotion,""swingingnotice," and "jackpot notification."
Among these, "pseudo continuous fanning" and "oscillation notice" perform "first movable member small descent" and "first movable member return to origin", and the first movable member LED lights up alternately in red and white. (luminous).
In addition, in the "jackpot notification", "the first movable member greatly descends" and "the first movable member returns to the origin", and the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in a rainbow.
That is, compared to initial operation pattern 1,
There is no effect movement that performs the entire initial movement pattern 1 (including the initial movement of the second movable member 74).
In addition, the initial operations related to the first movable member 73 in the initial operation pattern 1, that is, "first movable member small descent", "first movable member return to origin", "first movable member large descent", "first movable member 1. There is no performance movement that performs all of the steps 1. Return to origin of movable member in a series.
Further, there is no performance operation that uses the same lighting color as the lighting color of the first movable member LED in the initial operation pattern 1.
That can be said.
That is, the initial operations related to the first movable member 73 in the initial operation pattern 1 include "first movable member small descent", "first movable member return to origin", "first movable member large descent", and "first movable member 73". It consists only of a performance movement that performs a part of "returning the member to its origin".
As a result, an action other than the action performed in the initial action pattern 1 is not performed as a performance action, so by checking the initial action, it is possible to confirm whether a plurality of types of performance actions can be performed without problems.
Furthermore, in any of the performance actions, the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in a color different from the lighting color of the first movable member LED in the initial action pattern 1, so that it is easy to distinguish between the initial action and the performance action.

It should be noted that there may be a performance operation that performs all of "first movable member small descent", "first movable member return to origin", "first movable member large descent", and "first movable member return to origin".

As described above, the performance operations using the second movable member 74 include the "development performance" and the "increase notice performance."
Both the "development effect" and the "ascend notice effect" perform "the second movable member rises,""the second movable part rotates → stops," and "the second movable member returns to its origin," and the first movable member LED is ``Development effect'' lights up (lights up) in green, and ``Rise notice effect'' lights up (lights up) in red.
That is, compared to initial operation pattern 1,
There is no effect movement that performs the entire initial movement pattern 1 (including the initial movement of the first movable member 73).
In addition, there is no performance motion that executes a part of the initial motion related to the second movable member 74 in the initial motion pattern 1.
Further, there is no performance operation that uses the same lighting color as the lighting color of the second movable member LED in the initial action pattern 1.
That can be said.
In other words, the initial motion related to the second movable member 74 in the initial motion pattern 1, the performance motion that performs all of the "second movable member rise", "second movable part rotation → stop", and "second movable member return to origin" It consists only of
As a result, an action other than the action performed in the initial action pattern 1 is not performed as a performance action, so by checking the initial action, it is possible to confirm whether a plurality of types of performance actions can be performed without problems.
Furthermore, in any of the performance actions, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in a color different from the lighting color of the second movable member LED in the initial action pattern 1, so that it is easy to distinguish between the initial action and the performance action.

Note that there may be a performance operation that partially performs "second movable member rising", "second movable member rotation→stop", and "second movable member return to origin". For example, there may be a performance operation of "rising the second movable member" and "returning the second movable member to the origin".

(Comparison of initial motion and performance motion of movable parts of frame role)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a comparison between the initial motion and the performance motion of the movable member of the frame accessory.
Specifically, a comparison is shown between the initial motion pattern 1 of FIG. 45 and the production motion of the third movable member (production button 17).

The performance operation using the third movable member (performance button 17) is, for example, when performing a "button hit" for a "jackpot" as in the variable performance pattern 42, or when performing a "button vibration" as in the variable performance pattern 17, for example. An example of this is when a jackpot preview performance such as '' is performed.
Among these, in the variable production pattern represented by variable production pattern 42, "production button large rise & continuous vibration (5 seconds)", "production button return to origin", and "production button intermittent vibration (5 seconds)" are performed. , the production button LED lights up (lights up) alternately in red and white.
In addition, in a variable performance pattern represented by variable performance pattern 17, "continuous vibration of the performance button (for 1 second)" is performed, and the performance button LED lights up (lights up) in white.
That is, compared to initial operation pattern 1,
In the variable performance pattern represented by the variable performance pattern 42, the processes of "performance button large rise & continuous vibration", "performance button return to origin", and "performance button intermittent vibration" are the same, but the vibrating time is different. differ.
Further, the variable performance pattern typified by the variable performance pattern 17 is not the same as any of the steps, and is common to the initial operation pattern 1 only in that the performance button 17 vibrates continuously.
That can be said.
As a result, an action other than the action performed in the initial action pattern 1 is not performed as a performance action, so by checking the initial action, it is possible to confirm whether a plurality of types of performance actions can be performed without problems.
In addition, in any performance operation, the lighting mode is different from the lighting color of the performance button LED in the initial operation pattern 1, so it is easy to distinguish between the initial operation and the performance operation.

It should be noted that there may be a performance operation that performs all of "performance button large rise & continuous vibration (2 seconds)", "performance button return to origin", and "performance button intermittent vibration (2 seconds)".

(Variation example of initial movement pattern of board accessories related to performance movement)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a modified example of the board accessory initial movement pattern related to the performance movement.

As described in FIG. 68, the first movable member 73 is a movable member that can be operated in the scene of a preview or the scene of a jackpot notification, such as a rocking preview or a jackpot notification of a fixed performance. On the other hand, the second movable member 74 is a movable member that can be operated in the event of advance notice, such as a development effect or an upward advance notice effect, but cannot be operated in the event of jackpot notification.
This modification is characterized in that, as shown in (b), the initial operation of the first movable member 73 activated by jackpot notification is performed at the end of the initial operation process.
That is, in the initial operation pattern 1 according to this modification, the initial operation process for the second movable member 74 is performed first, and then the initial operation process for the first movable member 73 is performed.

In particular, the movable members that operate in the jackpot notification situation tend to be large in size, have a large operating range, have a large number of movable members in operation, and take a long time to operate. Therefore, it can be said that some kind of operational trouble is likely to occur.
If such a movable member is performed in the first half of the initial operation process, if any operational trouble occurs, it will be possible to move on to the initial operation process of another movable member (for example, a movable member that has a small operating range and is less likely to cause operational trouble). Otherwise, there is a risk that the initial operation process will be delayed.
On the other hand, if the configuration is as shown in FIG. 71, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the initial operation process will be delayed.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Initial processing of accessories in the lamp/drive control section)
Accessory initial processing by the lamp/drive control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing accessory initial processing by the lamp/drive control section 150.
In addition, here, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same process as the accessory initial process of 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate|omitted, and different process is demonstrated.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether there is a power ON flag set in the lamp RAM 150c at the time of starting power supply. If there is no power ON flag, the process moves to step R101C, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R101C, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. The process moves to step R101D, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R103.

In step R101D, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 60 seconds after the last power ON, when the return operation and initial operation should have been completed), the process moves to step R102, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed. If so, the process moves to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the return-to-origin process for the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of the accessory initialization process. Set "1".

As described above, according to the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 72, when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories are started. . By doing this, there is no need to be aware of whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the operation.

Furthermore, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. command, power restoration designation command) is received, the restoration operation of various accessories and the initial operation are performed again. By doing this, the main control board 110 did not start up normally and the power-on command was sent later than usual (an abnormality related to the power line from the power board 160 to the main control board 110 occurred). This makes it possible to understand what is being done.

In addition, when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, the return operation of various accessories and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not need to be aware of the period of time that has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the process when the power-on command is received.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission. do.

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes to red. and white alternately.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lights white). Become. At timing T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At timing T8, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started, and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. .

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of a recovery error (abnormality notification mode), and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. finish.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. However, since the initial operation process has been completed this time, the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state occurs.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the first movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the second movable member LED and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed. finish.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. However, since the initial operation process has been completed this time, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (lit white) while waiting for a customer.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the production button LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the off state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes to red. and white alternately.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer. At timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state occurs.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission. do.

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. At the same time, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up (lights up) in white.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lights white). Become.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the second movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. .

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of a recovery error (abnormality notification mode), and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. finish.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and alternates between red and white. However, since the initial operation process has been completed this time, the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lit white).

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the first movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the second movable member LED and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up blue as an initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as an initial light emission.

At the timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being executed. finish.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up in white (lights up). However, since the initial operation process has been completed this time, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for the customer.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the production button LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the off state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. Then, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up (lights up) in white.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer.

At timing T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and with pending memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off.
Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights in red → green → blue as initial light emission. Lights up (lights up) in this order.

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the second power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED emit light. The appearance changes and the light goes out.
At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen including the words "Please resume the game," and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number is displayed on the image display device. A state in which no pending numbers are displayed in the display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub-second hold display 84 and the sub-universal drawing hold display 86 have a display mode showing "0".

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are maintained in an extinguished state.

At timing T7, when a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the "753" effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ in a stopped state (still display). A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) is displayed, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "2".

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

Cases in which the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally include cases in which power is not supplied to the main control board 110, cases in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and cases in which the command communication line Examples include cases where the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state).

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in red → green → blue as initial light emission. Lights up (lights up) in this order.

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, the special symbol storage designation command (the first pending number and the second When receiving the pending number=0, the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED change and are turned off. becomes.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen remains displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special pattern variation pattern specification command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. , and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable production (production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon, or the icon concerned) , BGM output) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

Note that the specific example of the case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on is also the same as the specific example of the case where the power restoration designation command mentioned above cannot be received normally.

(Specific example of restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 83 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a specific example of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

At the timing of T1, various accessories are already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation and initial operation are completed, and the image display device shows the production symbol "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a, and a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen with the special design TZ being stopped and displayed (stationary display), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button are displayed. The LED lights up while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also display contents. maintain.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED does not perform initial light emission and remains lit while waiting for the customer, and the On the display device, a first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of “135”, which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). In this case, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various characters have finished, or during jackpot games (opening, round game, ending) ), even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during execution, the image display is not completed until the power-on designation command is received as the power-on command at timing T4. Except for the fact that the screen displayed on the device is a variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen), This is similar to the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped.

Furthermore, in the case where there is an abnormality in each accessory, the initial operations of the various accessories will be performed in the same way as the specific example shown in FIG. 74, FIG. 75, or FIG. 76.

Next, a case will be described in which the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the main power supply is restarted while the backup power supply continues.

If the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed with the symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ being stopped and displayed (stationary display), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production are displayed. The button LED is lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

Thereafter, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 ( The sub first fluctuation indicator 81, the second sub fluctuation indicator 82, the first sub hold indicator 83, the second sub hold indicator 84, the sub general fluctuation indicator 85, the sub general hold indicator 86) are also displayed. Maintain content.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

Thereafter, when the production control board 130 receives a power recovery designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the origin position of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is The return operation to is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED does not perform initial light emission but maintains light emission while waiting for the customer. On the display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen, the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). A second standby screen is displayed.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, Initial operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

When the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn on (white light) while waiting for a customer. .

In addition, if the variable performance (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) is already being executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various characters has been completed, that is, the variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device. is displayed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted, the message is also transmitted from the main control board 110. When the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, the restoration operation of various accessories and the initial operation are executed. At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen containing the words "Please resume the game" instead of the variable effect screen, and the returning screen is displayed until the next special symbol confirmation command is received. maintain.

In addition, power supply (backup) to the main control board 110 is performed during the execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have already been completed. Even in the case where only the power source (including the power source) stops and then restarts, when the production control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation are executed. . At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect screen instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and maintains the display of the special jackpot effect screen until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. . Note that the display of a special jackpot effect screen may be maintained until the jackpot game ends.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting that the power supply is to be restarted is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device after returning to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device (initial screen display only), and after recovery to no pending memory/with pending memory while special symbols are being displayed. The display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device (the display of the initial screen + the screen during recovery) is made to be different. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when the stopped power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display It is possible to display a hold display indicating the number of hold memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is hold memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the image display device is performing a specific display suggesting the restart of power supply, the hold icon display area does not execute the hold display, but the sub hold display can execute the hold display. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. It becomes possible to suppress this.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). By doing this, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, and the display control when restoring the control state of the game after the power supply was resumed. It becomes possible to reduce such processing load.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, the sub-variation displays (sub-first variation display 81, sub-second variation display 82) display special symbols after the control state of the game is restored. Even if the variable display is being executed (the returning screen is displayed), the variable display (blinking display) is not performed while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. By doing this, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, for the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. (before the variable display is performed on the sub variable display and at the time of receiving the special symbol storage designation command), the display mode is designed to show the pending number. By doing this, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display (blinking display) on the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-hold indicators (the first sub-hold indicator 83 and the second sub-hold indicator 84) may be set in a display mode that shows the number of holds. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as when the power is turned on, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed). By doing this, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, during the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), the light emission of various accessories (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, production button LED) are turned off. By doing this, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, if any of the various accessories has a return abnormality, the light emitting part of the accessory that has the return error will blink red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. By doing this, it becomes possible to know which accessory has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has returned abnormally, until the next fluctuating effect is started. Abnormality notifications continue. By doing this, it becomes possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The initial operations of various accessories are performed at the same timing as when the user is turned on, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed). By doing this, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, for the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-first holding display 83, An initial operation is performed before the 2-hold display 84) changes to a display mode showing the number of holds (a returning screen is displayed on the image display device). By doing this, it becomes easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the performance being hindered by the initial movements of the board accessories. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, for the frame accessory (production button 17), the sub-holding display (the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84) is on hold. Initial operations are performed before the display mode is changed to indicate a number (a returning screen is displayed on the image display device). By doing this, it becomes easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the production being hindered by the initial movements of the frame accessories. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even when the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Become.

In addition, when displaying the stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the return operation, initial operation, etc. of various accessories, Then, while performing initial light emission, the initial screen continues to be displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to understand that an abnormality has occurred in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even if the initial screen continues to be displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, , When receiving a special symbol storage designation command based on winning of a game ball to the starting hole from the main control board 110, a winning sound is output. By doing this, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has landed in the starting slot.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main When a variation start command is received from the control board 110, a variation effect is executed without displaying a standby screen. By doing this, the start of the variable presentation is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to execute the variable presentation from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even if the main control board If the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the restoration operation of various accessories and the initial operation are performed again. (initial light emission). By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

In addition, during the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission), during variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or during jackpot games (opening effect, round effect, ending effect). However, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command or power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the various accessories are restarted. The return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even if the customer is in a waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped. When restarting, for example, and receiving a power-on designation command from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

In addition, even if the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished (loss fluctuation performance, jackpot fluctuation performance) or jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance), the main control board 110 If the power supply is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Note that when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various accessories. You can just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, power supply to the main control board 110 is continued even after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 after the main control board 110 stops, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the power is turned on again from the main control board 110. When the input designation command is received, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

It should be noted that only when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 while waiting for a customer (while displaying the standby screen on which the performance pattern 70a is displayed, while displaying the customer-waiting demonstration performance screen). In the case where a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 during a fluctuation performance (loss fluctuation performance, jackpot fluctuation performance) or jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance). It is also a good idea to display the standby screen instead of the initial screen.

In addition, even if the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished (loss fluctuation performance, jackpot fluctuation performance) or jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance), the main control board 110 If the power supply is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 110 When the power recovery designation command is received again from the controller, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

<About other inventions described in the above embodiments>
Other inventions described in the present embodiment described above will be described below.

In conventional gaming machines, various presentation means are provided on the game board surface, and the presentation means are used to improve the interest in the game. As such a presentation means, there is a method that includes a movable presentation means (so-called gimmick) and operates the movable presentation means (so-called gimmick) in a predetermined operating mode (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236681). ). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has room for improvement in terms of accurately operating the movable presentation means.

(a) As a first configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a movable presentation means (for example, the first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and a power supply initial processing means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs main control board initialization processing) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the game or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; After the start of the initial operation of the movable effect means (for example, move the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the first initial operation position B, for example, move the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second initial operation position control means (e.g., lamp/drive control section 150) capable of performing an operation between the operating position C and the movable effect means in the initial operation (e.g., the origin position A ) to a specific operating position (for example, the first initial operating position B, for example, the second initial operating position C) (for example, the moving time from the origin position A to the first initial operating position B is 0.3S , for example, the time it takes to move the movable presentation means from the specific operation position to the initial position (for example, the time it takes to move from the origin position A to the second initial operation position C is 0.8 seconds) The moving time from B to the origin position A is 0.6S; for example, the moving time from the second initial operating position C to the origin position A is 1.6S) is longer (for example, 0.3S<0.6S, For example, the relationship is 0.8S<1.6S).
Thereby, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately without imposing a load on the drive source.

(b) As a second configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a movable presentation means (for example, the first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and a During execution (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display), the performance operation of the movable performance means (for example, the first movable member 73 is moved between the origin position A and the first performance position B, for example, the first movable a control means (for example, a lamp/drive control section 150) capable of moving the member 73 between the origin position A and the second presentation position C; from the initial position (for example, origin position A) to a specific operation position (for example, first production position B, for example, second production position C) (for example, from origin position A to first production position B) The moving time is 0.5S, for example, the moving time from the origin position A to the second presentation position C is 1S). The travel time from the production position B to the origin position A is 0.8S, for example, the travel time from the second production position C to the origin position A is 2S) is longer (for example, 0.5S<0.8S, for example , 1S<2S).
Thereby, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately without imposing a load on the drive source.

(c) As a third configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a movable presentation means (for example, the second movable member 74) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and a power supply initial processing means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs main control board initialization processing) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the game or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; control means (for example, lamp/drive control) capable of performing the initial operation of the movable presentation means (for example, operating the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third initial operation position E) after the start of part 150), in the initial operation, the movable presentation means is operated from an initial position (for example, the origin position D) to a specific operation position (for example, the third initial operation position E) for a period of time (for example, 0). .6S), the time (e.g., 0.3S) for moving the movable presentation means from the specific operating position to the initial position is shorter (e.g., 0.6S>0.3S); It is characterized by
Thereby, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately without imposing a load on the drive source.

(d) As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a movable presentation means (for example, the second movable member 74) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and a It is possible to perform the performance operation of the movable performance means (for example, move the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third performance position E) during execution (for example, from the start of fluctuation until the stop display). control means (for example, lamp/drive control unit 150), and in the performance operation, the movable performance means is moved from an initial position (for example, origin position D) to a specific operation position (for example, third performance position E). ) The time (for example, 0.5S) for moving the movable presentation means from the specific operation position to the initial position is shorter than the time (for example, 0.8S) for operating the movable presentation means from the specific operation position to the initial position (for example, 0.8S> 0.5S).
Thereby, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately without imposing a load on the drive source.

(e) As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable presentation means (for example, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and an initial processing means that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before the stop of power supply (for example, a main control board initialization process CPU 110a) and the initial operation of the movable effect means (for example, operating the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second initial operation position C, for example, moving the second movable member 74 to the origin) after the start of power supply. during the execution of the game (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display), the performance operation of the movable performance means (for example, the first movable member 73 is performed). Control means (for example, a lamp) that can operate between the origin position A and the second presentation position C, for example, operate the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third presentation position E. /drive control unit 150), and in the initial operation, the movable presentation means is moved to an initial position (for example, the origin position A for the first movable member 73, and the origin position D for the second movable member 74). ) to a specific operating position (for example, the second presentation position C for the first movable member 73; for example, the third presentation position E for the second movable member 74) 73, 0.8S, for example, 0.6S for the second movable member 74), and the time for moving the movable presentation means from the initial position to the specific operation position in the presentation operation (for example, the second movable member 74). 1S for the first movable member 73, for example, 0.8S for the second movable member 74) and a different time (for example, 0.8S≠1S for the first movable member 73, for example, 0.8S for the second movable member 74, for example, 0.8S for the second movable member 74, For the member 74, the relationship is 0.6S≠0.8S).
As a result, for example, the time required for the initial action can be shortened by operating the initial action in a shorter time than the presentation action, while the time required for the initial action can be reduced by operating the production action for a longer time than the initial action. It is possible to prevent the player from being late in noticing that the performance using the movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is being performed. As a result, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately.

(f) As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a movable presentation means (for example, the first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and a power supply initial processing means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs main control board initialization processing) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the game or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; After the start of , the movable effect means performs an initial operation (for example, moves the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the first initial operation position B), and during the execution of the game (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display) control means (for example, lamp/drive control part 150), and in the initial operation, the movable presentation means is operated for a period of time (e.g., 0.00 to 0.000) for operating the movable presentation means from an initial position (e.g., origin position A) to a specific operation position (e.g., first initial operation position B). 3S), and a time (for example, 0.3S) for operating the movable presentation means from the initial position (for example, origin position A) to the specific operation position (for example, first presentation position B) in the presentation operation; , are the same time (for example, both are 0.3S).
Thereby, common drive data can be used for the initial operation and the performance operation, and it is possible to reduce the amount of drive data. As a result, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately.

(g) As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73, the second A movable member 74) and an initial processing means (for example, main control board initialization processing) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before power supply was stopped. The main CPU 110a) performs the initial operation of the movable effect means (for example, operates the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second initial operation position C, for example, the second movable member 74) after the start of power supply. (operates between the origin position D and the third initial operation position E), and performs the performance operation of the movable performance means (for example, the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second presentation position C, for example, the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third presentation position E. , lamp/drive control unit 150), and in the initial operation, the movable presentation means is moved to a specific operation position (for example, if it is the first movable member 73, the second presentation position C, for example, the second movable member 74). (for example, the origin position A for the first movable member 73; for example, the origin position D for the second movable member 74) (for example, the first 1.6S for the movable member 73, for example, 0.3S for the second movable member 74), and a time for operating the movable presentation means from the specific operation position to the initial position in the presentation operation (for example, 0.3S for the second movable member 74). , 2S for the first movable member 73, 0.5S for the second movable member 74) and a different time (for example, 1.6S≠2S for the first movable member 73, for example, 0.5S for the second movable member 74). 2 movable member 74, the relationship is 0.3S≠0.5S).
As a result, for example, the time required for the initial action can be shortened by activating the initial action in a shorter time than the production action, while the time required for the initial action can be reduced by activating the production action for a longer time than the initial action. It is possible to prevent the player from being late in noticing that the performance using the movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is being executed. As a result, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately.

(h) As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable presentation means (for example, the first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and the power supply initial processing means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs main control board initialization processing) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the game or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; After the start of , the movable effect means performs an initial operation (for example, moves the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the first initial operation position B), and during the execution of the game (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display) control means (for example, lamp/drive control part 150), and in the initial operation, the movable presentation means is operated from a specific operation position (for example, first initial operation position B) to an initial position (for example, origin position A) for a period of time (for example, 0. 6S), and a time (for example, 0.6S) for operating the movable performance means from the specific operation position (for example, first performance position B) to the initial position (for example, origin position A) in the performance operation; , are the same time (for example, both are 0.6S).
Thereby, common drive data can be used for the initial operation and the performance operation, and it is possible to reduce the amount of drive data. As a result, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately.

(i) As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, and a It is possible to perform the performance operation of the movable performance means (for example, move the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second performance position C) during execution (for example, from the start of fluctuation until the stop display). control means (for example, a lamp/drive control unit 150), and a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game, for example, a high probability game state) is provided in the performance operation. The notification performance operation includes a notification performance operation to notify (for example, a big drop in jackpot notification), and the notification performance operation moves the movable performance means from an initial position (for example, origin position A) to a specific operation position (for example, second performance position C). ) The time for operating the movable presentation means from the specific operating position to the initial position (for example, 2S) is longer than the time for operating the movable presentation means from the specific operation position to the initial position (for example, 2S) (for example, there is a relationship of 1S<2S) , is characterized by.
As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction for winning the jackpot, and it is also possible to make the player feel the afterglow of winning the jackpot. As a result, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately.

(j) As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable presentation means (for example, the first movable member 73, the second A movable member 74) and an initial processing means (for example, main control board initialization processing) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before power supply was stopped. The main CPU 110a) performs the initial operation of the movable effect means (for example, operates the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second initial operation position C, for example, the second movable member 74) after the start of power supply. (operates between the origin position D and the third initial operation position E), and performs the performance operation of the movable performance means (for example, the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second presentation position C, for example, the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third presentation position E. , lamp/drive control unit 150), and in the initial operation and the presentation operation, the movable presentation means is moved to the initial position (for example, the origin position A for the first movable member 73, for example, the second movable member 74, the origin position D) to a specific operating position (for example, if the first movable member 73, the second initial operating position C and the second production position C; for example, if the second movable member 74, the third initial stage) It is possible to move the movable presentation means to the operating position E and the third presentation position E) and make it stay at the specific operation position, and in the initial operation, it is possible to make the movable presentation means stay at the specific operation position (for example, the third presentation position E). 2S for the first movable member 73, for example, 5S for the second movable member 74), the time for the movable presentation means to stay at the specific operation position in the presentation operation (for example, the first movable member 73) If so, 5S, for example, 7S if the second movable member 74) is longer (for example, if the first movable member 73, there is a relationship of 2S<5S; for example, if the second movable member 74, the relationship is 2S<5S). 5S<7S).
As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction for winning the jackpot, and it is also possible to make the player feel the afterglow of winning the jackpot. As a result, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately.

(k) As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable presentation means (for example, the first movable member 73, the second A movable member 74) and an initial processing means (for example, main control board initialization processing) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before power supply was stopped. The main CPU 110a) performs the initial operation of the movable effect means (for example, operates the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second initial operation position C, for example, the second movable member 74) after the start of power supply. (operation between origin position D and third initial operating position E); The first movable presentation means includes a presentation means (for example, a first movable member 73) and a second movable presentation means (for example, a second movable member 74) different from the first movable presentation means. The initial operation is shorter than the time (for example, 0.8S) for operating from the first initial position (for example, origin position A) to the first operation position (for example, second initial operation position C). The time required for the second movable presentation means to move from the operating position to the first initial position (e.g., 1.6S) is longer (e.g., 0.8S<1.6S); The initial operation is performed at a time shorter than the time (for example, 0.3S) for operating from the second operation position (for example, the third initial operation position E) to the second initial position (for example, the origin position D). It is characterized in that the time required to operate from the position to the second operation position (for example, 0.6S) is longer (for example, there is a relationship of 0.3S<0.6S).
Thereby, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately without imposing a load on the drive source.

(l) As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74), and the production operation of the movable production means (for example, moving the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second production position C) during the execution of the game (for example, from the start of fluctuation until the stop display). a control means (e.g., lamp/drive control section 150) capable of operating the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third presentation position E; The movable presentation means includes a first movable presentation means (for example, the first movable member 73) and a second movable presentation means (for example, the second movable member 74) that is different from the first movable presentation means. The presentation operation of the first movable presentation means is performed for a period of time (for example, 1S) for operating from a first initial position (for example, origin position A) to a first operation position (for example, second presentation position C). ), the time for operating from the first operating position to the first initial position (e.g., 2S) is longer (e.g., 1S<2S), and the The presentation operation takes longer than the time (for example, 0.5S) to move from the second operation position (e.g., third presentation position E) to the second initial position (e.g., origin position D). It is characterized in that the time (for example, 0.8S) for the operation from the first position to the second operation position is longer (for example, there is a relationship of 0.5S<0.8S).
Thereby, the movable presentation means can be operated accurately without imposing a load on the drive source.

(m) As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable presentation means (for example, the first movable member 73, the second A movable member 74) and an initial processing means (for example, main control board initialization processing) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before power supply was stopped. The main CPU 110a) performs the initial operation of the movable effect means (for example, operates the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second initial operation position C, for example, the second movable member 74) after the start of power supply. (operates between the origin position D and the third initial operation position E), and performs the performance operation of the movable performance means (for example, the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second presentation position C, for example, the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third presentation position E. , lamp/drive control unit 150), and the movable presentation means includes a first movable presentation device (for example, a first movable member 73) and a second movable presentation device different from the first movable presentation device. a presentation means (for example, a second movable member 74), and the first movable presentation means performs the same operation in the initial operation and the presentation operation (for example, moves the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the 2. The operation performed between the second initial operation position C and the operation performed between the first movable member 73 and the origin position A and the second production position C are the same operation. The presentation means operates differently between the initial operation and the presentation operation (for example, in the initial operation, the second movable member 74 stops the rotation of the rotating body 74a at the third presentation position E, and then moves to the origin position D). However, the performance operation is characterized in that the rotation of the rotating body 74a is not stopped at the third performance position E, but is moved to the origin position D while being rotated.
As a result, for example, in the second movable member 74 whose operation is more complicated than that of the first movable member 73, it is possible to omit part of the performance operation in the initial operation, so that the initial movement can be performed while maintaining the interest of the performance. The time required for operation can be shortened. In addition, it is possible to perform accurate operations in accordance with the operation mode of each movable presentation means.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to shift to a high probability gaming state a predetermined number of times after all jackpot games are completed, the inside of the jackpot opening 50 opened in a specific round of jackpot games. The game machine may be configured to shift to a high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game when the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the game machine.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are finished, the game is moved to a high probability game state, and if the player wins the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display in the high probability game state, the high probability game state is ended and the normal It is also possible to use a gaming machine that returns to a gaming state.

In addition, if the type of jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, the transition to a low probability gaming state is made after the end of the jackpot game, and if the type of the jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol, the next time after the end of the jackpot game. It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high probability gaming state that continues until a jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol has priority. It may also be executed by

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.

1 Game machine 17 Production button 73 First movable member 74 Second movable member 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU
150 Lamp/drive control section 150a Lamp CPU

Claims (1)

A main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, a performance control means capable of controlling a performance according to a signal from the main control means, and a movable performance means capable of operating in a predetermined manner. In a gaming machine equipped with,
The main control means is
It is possible to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to restore it to the state before power supply was stopped,
The performance control means is
It is possible to control the initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and to control the performance operation of the movable performance means during the execution of the game,
In the initial operation,
The time for operating the movable presentation means from the initial position to the operating position is different from the time for operating from the operating position to the initial position,
It is possible to display a game standby screen in which a plurality of performance symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination on a predetermined display means in a standby state where a game is not in progress;
While the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the game standby screen is being displayed, if the power supply to the production control means is continued, it is possible to continue displaying the game standby screen. ,
Thereafter, when power supply to the main control means is started, it is possible to control the initial operation of the movable presentation means and to display the plurality of presentation symbols in a specific combination different from the predetermined combination. and
When the power supply to the main control means and the effect control means is started after that while the power supply to the main control means and the effect control means is stopped,
It is possible to display the plurality of production symbols in the specific combination after displaying the initial screen,
When the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the production control means continues, and then the power supply to the main control means is started,
A gaming machine capable of displaying the plurality of performance symbols in the specific combination without displaying the initial screen .